OPERATION MANUAL

INSTALLATION AND
FCD-E1LC
E1/Fractional E1 Managed Access Unit
Version 1.0

Innovative Access Solutions

 FCD-E1LC
E1/Fractional E1 Managed Access Unit
Version 1.0
Installation and Operation Manual

Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD").
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written
approval by RAD Data Communications.
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other
intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the FCD-E1LC and
any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under
international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD.
FCD-E1LC is a registered trademark of RAD. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is
granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by
you with respect to such trademark.
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the
FCD-E1LC. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market,
distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the
FCD-E1LC, based on or derived in any way from the FCD-E1LC. Your undertaking in this paragraph
shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the FCD-E1LC package and shall continue until
terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof.
Upon such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the FCD-E1LC and all copies and
portions thereof.
For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.

International Headquarters North America Headquarters

RAD Data Communications Ltd. RAD Data Communications Inc.

24 Raoul Wallenberg Street 900 Corporate Drive

Tel Aviv 69719, Israel Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA
Tel: 972-3-6458181 Tel: (201) 5291100, Toll free: 1-800-4447234
Fax: 972-3-6498250, 6474436 Fax: (201) 5295777
E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

© 1991–2007 RAD Data Communications Ltd. Publication No. 289-200-03/07

 Limited Warranty
RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the FCD-E1LC to be delivered hereunder shall
be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of
twelve (12) months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR.
If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by
reason of material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect,
RAD shall have the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement
part, or b) request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at
the equipment's location. In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party
shall pay one-way shipping costs.
RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has
been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or
modifications were made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless
such repairs by others were made with the written consent of RAD.
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for
consequential damages.
RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not
limited to, lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the
manufacture, sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the FCD-E1LC, and in no event shall
RAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the FCD-E1LC.
DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes
relating to FCD-E1LC and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in
connection with the said warranties are satisfactory.
Software components in the FCD-E1LC are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind.
RAD disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or
indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD
shall do its best to provide error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates
during the warranty period under this Agreement.
RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any
claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the FCD-E1LC shall
not exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the FCD-E1LC. In no event shall RAD be
liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits,
even if RAD has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of
Israel.

Product Disposal
To facilitate the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of waste
equipment in protecting the environment, the owner of this RAD product is
required to refrain from disposing of this product as unsorted municipal
waste at the end of its life cycle. Upon termination of the unit’s use,
customers should provide for its collection for reuse, recycling or other form
of environmentally conscientious disposal.
 General Safety Instructions
The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of
telecommunications products. Additional instructions, if applicable, are included inside the
manual.

Safety Symbols
This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates potential
safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to operator or service
personnel.
Warning

Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while the
product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines.

Protective earth: the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the building
protective earth bus.

Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label with the
laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near the optical
transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached.
Warning Please observe the following precautions:
• Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is intact
and is connected to the transmitter.
• Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current.
• Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look
straight at the laser beam.
• The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard.
• Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!

In some cases, the users may insert their own SFP laser transceivers into the product. Users are
alerted that RAD cannot be held responsible for any damage that may result if non-compliant
transceivers are used. In particular, users are warned to use only agency approved products that
comply with the local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products.
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of
this product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment,
maintenance or repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs
should be performed by either the operator or the user.
 Handling Energized Products

General Safety Practices

Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected. Line voltages
may be present inside certain products even when the power switch (if installed) is in the OFF
position or a fuse is blown. For DC-powered products, although the voltages levels are usually
not hazardous, energy hazards may still exist.
Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, remove
jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts.
Unless otherwise specified, all products are intended to be grounded during normal use.
Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective earth
terminal. If an earth lug is provided on the product, it should be connected to the protective
earth at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment
should be mounted only in earthed racks and cabinets.
Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect
telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are
disconnected before disconnecting the ground.

Connecting AC Mains
Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes.
Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking
capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.
Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power
switch is provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be
readily disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or
emergency switch is installed in the building installation.
In cases when the power distribution system is IT type, the switch must disconnect both poles
simultaneously.

Connecting DC Mains
Unless otherwise specified in the manual, the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference
to the ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded.
Due to the high current capability of DC mains systems, care should be taken when connecting
the DC supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards.
DC units should be installed in a restricted access area, i.e. an area where access is authorized
only to qualified service and maintenance personnel.
Make sure that the DC supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the installation
complies with the local codes.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking
capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.
Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. Locate
the circuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF
position. When connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the
corresponding terminal, then the positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit
breaker back to the ON position.
A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated
in the building installation.
If the DC mains are floating, the switch must disconnect both poles simultaneously.

Connecting Data and Telecommunications Cables

Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status.
The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces. If the status of a given port
differs from the standard one, a notice will be given in the manual.

Ports Safety Status

V.11, V.28, V.35, V.36, RS-530, X.21, SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage:
10 BaseT, 100 BaseT, Unbalanced E1, Ports which do not present a safety hazard. Usually
E2, E3, STM, DS-2, DS-3, S-Interface up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC.
ISDN, Analog voice E&M
xDSL (without feeding voltage), TNV-1 Telecommunication Network Voltage-1:
Balanced E1, T1, Sub E1/T1 Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the
limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from
telecommunications networks are possible.
FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber) TNV-2 Telecommunication Network Voltage-2:
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are not possible. These
ports are not permitted to be directly connected to
external telephone and data lines.
FXO (Foreign Exchange Office), xDSL TNV-3 Telecommunication Network Voltage-3:
(with feeding voltage), U-Interface Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
ISDN limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are possible.

Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance
of a qualified safety engineer.
Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables.
Do not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables.
Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables.
Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms.
When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both
ends. The earthing and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes.
The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of
contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk,
 there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment
and the mating connectors.

Caution To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line
cords.

Attention Pour réduire les risques s’incendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de
télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure.

Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In
such cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions.
Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of
major regulatory bodies. The following instructions may enhance the performance of the
equipment and will provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity
against disturbances.
A good earth connection is essential. When installing the equipment in a rack, make sure to
remove all traces of paint from the mounting points. Use suitable lock-washers and torque. If an
external grounding lug is provided, connect it to the earth bus using braided wire as short as
possible.
The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) cables. However, the use of shielded wires is always recommended, especially
for high-rate data. In some cases, when unshielded wires are used, ferrite cores should be
installed on certain cables. In such cases, special instructions are provided in the manual.
Disconnect all wires which are not in permanent use, such as cables used for one-time
configuration.
The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines
is dependent on the cable quality. The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal
conversion loss (LCL).
Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual, TNV-1 and TNV-3 ports provide secondary
protection against surges on the data lines. Primary protectors should be provided in the building
installation.
The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro-static discharge (ESD).
However, it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with
plastic connectors (without a grounded metal hood, such as flat cables) to sensitive data lines.
Before connecting such cables, discharge yourself by touching earth ground or wear an ESD
preventive wrist strap.
 FCC-15 User Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the Installation and Operation manual, may cause harmful interference to the
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.

Canadian Emission Requirements

This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulation.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.

Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)

Warning This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures.

Avertissement Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel, cet
appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radioélectriques. Dans ces cas, il peut être
demandé à l’utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropriées.

Achtung Dieses ist ein Gerät der Funkstörgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohnbereichen können bei
Betrieb dieses Gerätes Rundfunkströrungen auftreten, in welchen Fällen der
Benutzer für entsprechende Gegenmaßnahmen verantwortlich ist.
 Declaration of Conformity

Manufacturer's Name: RAD Data Communications Ltd.

Manufacturer's Address: 24 Raoul Wallenberg St., Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
declares that the product:
Product Name: FCD-E1LC
conforms to the following standard(s) or other normative document(s):

EMC: EN 55022:1998 + Information technology equipment – Radio disturbance

A1:2000, A2:2003 characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement.

EN 55024:1998 + Information technology equipment – Immunity

A1:2001, A2:2003 characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement.

Safety: EN 60950-1:2001 Information technology equipment – Safety – Part 1:

General requirements.

Supplementary Information:

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC for wired equipment. The product
was tested in a typical configuration.

Tel Aviv, 17 May 2005

Haim Karshen
VP Quality

European Contact: RAD Data Communications GmbH, Otto-Hahn-Str. 28-30, 85521

Ottobrunn-Riemerling, Germany
 Quick Start Guide

If you are familiar with the FCD-E1LC, use this guide to prepare it for operation,
starting from its factory-default configuration.

1. Preliminary Preparations
At this stage, do not connect any cables to the FCD-E1LC.

Caution Before performing the preliminary preparation procedures described below,

review the safety precautions given in Section 2.1.

Set all the sections of the rear-panel E1/T1 LOOPBACK switch to OFF.

2. Connection to Power and Grounding

Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the
device) or disconnecting the protective earth terminal can make the device
dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
AC power should be supplied to the FCD-E1LC through the 5-foot (1.5m)
standard power cable terminated in a standard 3-prong plug.
The connection of the FCD-E1LC to a DC power source is made by means of a
cable terminated in the AC/DC adapter (AD) plug.
The AC power cord plug must be inserted in an outlet provided with a protective
ground (earth) contact, whereas when using DC power it is necessary to ground
the AD grounding terminal. The protective action must not be negated by use of
an extension cord (power cable) without a protective conductor (grounding).

Caution FCD-E1LC does not have a power on/off switch, and therefore it will start
operating as soon as power is applied. It is recommended to use an external
power on/off switch to control the connection of power to the FCD-E1LC. For
example, the circuit breaker used to protect the supply line to the FCD-E1LC may
also serve as the on/off switch.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Cable Connections 1

Quick Start Guide Installation and Operation Manual

3. Cable Connections
Refer to the site installation plan, and connect the prescribed cables to the
FCD-E1LC ports:

Cable Connect to …

Main link cable E1/T1 MAIN connector

Sub link cable (optional) E1/T1 SUB connector

Data channel 1 cable CH1 connector

Data channel 2 cable (optional) CH2 connector

Ethernet cable 10/100BASE-T connector

Note When using adapter cables for the data channels, first connect the adapter cable
to the data channel connector, and then connect the user’s data cable to the
adapter connector.

When ready, apply power to the FCD-E1LC.

4. Configuration Using a Supervisory Terminal

Starting a Preliminary Configuration Session

1. Connect a terminal to the CONTROL DCE port on the FCD-E1LC rear panel (use
a straight cable).
You may use any standard ASCII terminal (dumb terminal or personal
computer emulating an ASCII terminal) equipped with an RS-232
communication interface. Make sure to use VT-100 terminal emulation.
2. Configure the terminal for 19.2 kbps, one start bit, eight data bits, no parity,
and one stop bit. Select the full-duplex mode, echo off, and disable any type
of flow control.
3. Connect the FCD-E1LC to power.
4. Press the <Enter> key several times in sequence: you should see the
FCD-E1LC prompt, FCD>.
If you see PASSWORD> and the FCD-E1LC default password has not yet been
changed, type 1234 and then press <Enter> to obtain the prompt. If your
password is accepted, you will see the FCD-E1LC prompt.

Note If you cannot establish communication with the FCD-E1LC, reset FCD-E1LC
CONTROL DCE port parameters to the factory defaults using the internal switch
SW2 using the procedure described in Chapter 2.

2 Configuration Using a Supervisory Terminal FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Quick Start Guide

Configuration Procedure
Perform the following actions in the order given below.

Step Action Use the Command

1 Reset the database to the default parameters INIT DB

2 Define the terminal control codes DEF TERM

3 Configure the supervisory port DEF SP

DEF CALL

4 Set FCD-E1LC system time and date TIME

DATE

5 Configure management access and system parameters DEF SYS

DEF AGENT
DEF MANAGER LIST
DEF ROUTE

6 Configure the main link parameters DEF ML

7 Configure the sub link parameters (optional) DEF SL

8 Configure the data channel parameters DEF CH 1

DEF CH 2 (when installed)

9 Configure system timing DEF SYS

10 Define the general system parameters DEF NAME

DEF NODE
DEF PWD

11 Define the alarm handling parameters DEF AR

DEF ALM MASK

FCD-E1LC is now ready for operation.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Configuration Using a Supervisory Terminal 3

Quick Start Guide Installation and Operation Manual

4 Configuration Using a Supervisory Terminal FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction
1.1 Overview....................................................................................................................1-1
Purpose ..................................................................................................................1-1
Product Types.........................................................................................................1-1
Main Features.........................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Typical Applications....................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Physical Description ...................................................................................................1-4
1.4 Functional Description................................................................................................1-5
Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................................1-5
Internal Bus Functions ............................................................................................1-7
Main Link Interface .................................................................................................1-8
Sublink Interface.....................................................................................................1-9
Synchronous Data Channels ..................................................................................1-10
Asynchronous Data Channel RS-232/V.24 .............................................................1-11
Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................1-11
Timing ..................................................................................................................1-13
Diagnostics...........................................................................................................1-15
Timeslot Handling .................................................................................................1-16
Management Subsystem .......................................................................................1-16
Power Supply Subsystem ......................................................................................1-18
1.5 Timing Considerations ..............................................................................................1-19
Main Link Timing Application .................................................................................1-19
Data Channel Timing Application ...........................................................................1-19
1.6 System Management Considerations ........................................................................1-20
System Management Method................................................................................1-20
Management Access Options ................................................................................1-21
1.7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................1-24

Chapter 2. Installation and Setup

2.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................2-1
Scope .....................................................................................................................2-1
Safety Precautions..................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites ..........................................................................2-3
Physical Requirements ............................................................................................2-3
Power Requirements...............................................................................................2-3
Connections ...........................................................................................................2-3
Front and Rear Panel Clearance...............................................................................2-5
Ambient Requirements ...........................................................................................2-5
2.3 Package Contents ......................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Equipment Needed.....................................................................................................2-6
2.5 FCD-E1LC Enclosures ..................................................................................................2-6
FCD-E1LC Front Panel..............................................................................................2-6
FCD-E1LC Rear Panels .............................................................................................2-7
2.6 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches................................................................2-10
Opening the Unit ..................................................................................................2-10
Closing the Unit ....................................................................................................2-14
Installing FCD-E1LC in a Rack.................................................................................2-15
2.7 Connecting the Cables..............................................................................................2-15

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 i

Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual

Connecting the Main Link ......................................................................................2-15

Connecting the Sublink .........................................................................................2-16
Connecting the Data Channels ..............................................................................2-16
Connecting Ethernet .............................................................................................2-16
Connecting the CONTROL DCE Port .......................................................................2-17
2.8 Connecting to Power................................................................................................2-17

Chapter 3. Operation
3.1 Turning On the Unit ...................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Indicators ..................................................................................................................3-2
Front Panel Indications ...........................................................................................3-2
Ethernet Interface Status Indications ......................................................................3-2
3.3 Configuration and Management Alternatives ..............................................................3-3
Preliminary Configuration ........................................................................................3-3
System Configuration..............................................................................................3-3
Routine Management..............................................................................................3-4
Supervisory Terminal Characteristics........................................................................3-4
Telnet (IP) Host Characteristics ...............................................................................3-7
Connections for SNMP Management........................................................................3-7
3.4 Turning Off the Unit...................................................................................................3-7

Chapter 4. Configuration
4.1 Configuring for Management ......................................................................................4-1
Configuring the Supervision Terminal ......................................................................4-1
Starting a Control Session.......................................................................................4-2
Preliminary Configuration ........................................................................................4-3
Configuring for Telnet or SNMP Management ..........................................................4-4
Ending the Control Session .....................................................................................4-5
4.2 FCD-E1LC Command Language ...................................................................................4-5
Command Syntax ....................................................................................................4-5
What to Do If … ......................................................................................................4-6
Ending a Control Session.........................................................................................4-7
Command Options ..................................................................................................4-8
Index of Commands ................................................................................................4-8

Chapter 5. Configuring FCD-E1LC for a Typical Application

5.1 Typical Configuration Procedures................................................................................5-1
Outline of General Configuration Procedure ............................................................5-1
5.2 Configuration Example ...............................................................................................5-2
Configuring the Local FCD-E1LC...............................................................................5-3
Configuring the Remote FCD-E1LC...........................................................................5-6

Appendix A. Connection Data

Appendix B. SNMP Management
Appendix C. Operating Environment
Appendix D. Supervision Terminal Commands

ii FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Chapter 1
Introduction

1.1 Overview

Purpose
The FCD-E1LC is a managed access unit for business applications that integrates
voice and data traffic over E1 (2.048 Mbps) and fractional E1 services. FCD-E1LC
supports advanced management capabilities, including SNMP.

Product Types
The basic FCD-E1LC is offered with the following payload-carrying ports:
• E1 main link. This port has an ITU-T Rec. G.703 copper interface that can be
directly connected to E1/fractional E1 networks. The main link interface type
(balanced or unbalanced) is automatically selected in accordance with the
cable connected to the port (to support automatic selection, RAD offers a
special adapter cable). The interface operating mode, DSU or LTU, is
software-selectable. The integral LTU provides a range of up to 2 km.
• User channel 1. The FCD-E1LC is offered with a synchronous high-speed data
channel. This data channel can operate at rates of n×64 kbps or n×56 kbps,
where n is up to 31. The synchronous data channel can be ordered with
RS-530, V.35, V.36, or X.21 interface. The V.35, V.36 and X.21 interfaces are
supported by means of adapter cables.
FCD-E1LC can also accept a 2048 kbps data stream from a data channel and
convert it to an ITU-T Rec. G.703 unframed signal for transport over the E1
main link, and thus it can also serve as an interface converter and
high-speed, short distance modem.
In addition to the ports available on the basic FCD-E1LC unit, the following
additional payload-carrying ports can be ordered:
• E1 sublink. This port has characteristics similar to those of the main link port,
and it enables chaining of FCD-E1LC units, drop-&-insert, connection of
fractional E1 equipment, connection of a PBX with E1 trunk, etc.
• User channel 2. The FCD-E1LC also supports a second, optional user channel.
This channel can be ordered with one of the following interfaces:
Synchronous high-speed data channel with characteristics similar to those
of channel 1.
Asynchronous channel with a V.24 interface.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Overview 1-1

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

10/100BaseT Ethernet bridge with VLAN support, for direct connection to

LANs.
Both optional ports can be added to the same FCD-E1LC unit.

Note In this manual, the generic term FCD-E1LC is used when the information is
applicable to all the FCD-E1LC versions. Information applicable to a specific
version is explicitly identified.

Main Features
The FCD-E1LC main and sublink interfaces are compatible with virtually all
carrier-provided E1 services, meeting all the applicable requirements of
ITU-T Rec. G.823, G.703, G.704, G.706 and G.732. The interfaces support either
2 or 16 frames per multiframe, with or without CRC-4. Line code is HDB3.
Timeslot assignment is programmable, allowing data from each user port to be
placed into user-selectable timeslots.
FCD-E1LC supports various timing modes, to meet the specific requirements of
user’s applications and enable hierarchical dissemination of timing within the
network. Its nodal timing can be locked to:
• The clock signal recovered from the main link
• The optional sublink
• The receive clock of a serial data channel.
Alternatively, an internal oscillator can provide the timing.
FCD-E1LC operation can be controlled and monitored by means of supervision
terminals, Telnet hosts, and SNMP management stations. The management
communication can be either out-of-band, e.g., via connections to the FCD-E1LC
serial management port (either directly or through modem links), or inband with
the management traffic carried by the main link. These capabilities ensure that
FCD-E1LC units can be fully managed from one or more remote locations, in
accordance with the specific requirements of the using organization.
FCD-E1LC has a universal power supply that can operate on a wide range of AC
and DC power sources, including 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz and -48/-60 VDC, and
has low power consumption.
The FCD-E1LC is available as a standalone unit, intended for installation on
desktops or walls. An optional rack mount adapter kit enables installing one or
two FCD-E1LC units in a 19-inch rack, occupying only 1U.

1-2 Typical Applications FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

1.2 Typical Applications

FCD-E1LC units are used to extend various types of data services over a Fractional
E1 network. Figure 1-1 illustrates the applications supported by FCD-E1LC units.

Router
n x 64 kbps
FCD-E1LC

LAN

Router
ADM DXC n x 64 kbps
E1
FCD-E1LC
E1
Network
n x 64 kbps
Router

NMS
FE1

Sub Link LAN PBX

FCD-E1LC
Data Channel
n x 64 kbps
V.24
V.35 Router
V.36
X.21

Figure 1-1. FCD-E1LC Applications

The applications supported by the FCD-E1LC include:
• Connection of user’s data equipment through the E1 transport network to a
router or communication front-end that provides access to additional
services.
• When more than one data connection is required, the FCD-E1LC unit can be
equipped with a second synchronous data channel that can be independently
assigned timeslots on the main link, for connection to other equipment.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Typical Applications 1-3

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

• FCD-E1LC units with the optional sublink can be used to interconnect other
equipment with fractional E1 interface (for example, a local digital PBX
equipped with an E1 trunk can be connected to the PBX at the main office)
• The FCD-E1LC also provides Layer 2 (Ethernet bridge) services between a
remote LAN, for example, at a branch office, and the main office LAN. The
user can configure the FCD-E1LC to operate either as a LAN
extender/repeater that transparently transfers all the traffic on the local LAN
to the remote LAN, or as a remote bridge that filters the LAN traffic and
blocks traffic addressed to local stations. The FCD-E1LC bridge supports
VLANs and quality-of-service features.
The user can select the main link bandwidth allocated to each type of traffic in
accordance with the desired throughput.

1.3 Physical Description

Figure 1-2 shows a general view of a typical FCD-E1LC unit. FCD-E1LC is a
compact standalone unit, intended for installation on desktops or shelves. Unit
height is only 1U (1.75"). An optional rack-mount adapter kit enables the
installation of one or two FCD-E1LC units (side by side) in a 19-inch rack.
FCD-E1LC is cooled by free air convection, and does not include internal fans. The
FCD-E1LC front panel includes only indicators that indicate its status.

Figure 1-2. FCD-E1LC, General View

All the connections are made to connectors located on the rear panel. Two typical
rear panels are shown in Figure 1-3 (your panel may look different, depending on
the ordered options). The rear panel includes the following connectors:
• POWER connector – for connection to the power source (AC or DC)
• MAIN connector – for the FCD-E1LC main link connection
• SUB connector (optional) – for connection to the FCD-E1LC sublink
• CONTROL DCE connector – for connection to the serial supervisory port
• CH.1 connector – for connection to the channel 1 serial data port
• CH.2 connector (optional) – for connection to the channel 2 serial data port
or

1-4 Physical Description FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

CH.2 LAN connector (optional) – for connection to the 10/100Base-T

Ethernet port.

100 240 VAC/ 48 / 60 VDC CH. 2 10 / 100BASE-T

E1 / T1
E1 / T1 LOOPBACK 100M
SUB MAIN SUB MAIN LINK ACT
CONTROL
ON

LR LR

RETURN POWER DCE CH. 1

100 240 VAC/ 48 / 60 VDC

E1 / T1
E1 / T1 LOOPBACK
SUB MAIN SUB MAIN
CONTROL CH. 2
ON

LRLR

RETURN POWER DCE CH. 1

Figure 1-3. Typical FCD-E1LC Rear Panels

1.4 Functional Description

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 1-4 shows the functional block diagram of the FCD-E1LC system.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Functional Description 1-5

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

FCD-E1LC
Channel 2 (Optional)
Data Channel Ch.2
or Ethernet

Channel 1
Ch.1
Data Channel Data Port

RSER

TSER
Sub Link (Optional)
E1/T1
Framer LIU SUB

Main Link
E1/T1
Framer LIU MAIN
Address Bus
Clock Bus

Data Bus
TDM Bus

Test
Timing Subsystem
Subsystem

Inband
Management
Interface

CONTROL DCE Serial Port Management

Connector Interface Subsystem

Input Power Power Internal

Connector Supply Voltages Test Switch

Figure 1-4. FCD-E1LC Functional Block Diagram

FCD-E1LC includes several main subsystems:
• Internal buses
• Main link interface
• Sublink interface

1-6 Functional Description FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

• User interface subsystem (data channels with serial interfaces and Ethernet
port)
• Timing subsystem
• Test subsystem
• Management subsystem
• Power supply subsystem.
The characteristics of the various subsystems are explained below.

Internal Bus Functions

The FCD-E1LC system performs its various functions by controlling the flow of
data among the various user, sub and main link interfaces in accordance with the
application requirements.
The flow of data is performed through the FCD-E1LC buses, as shown in
Figure 1-4. FCD-E1LC comprises several buses:
• TDM bus, which carries the data to the main link. The TDM bus serves as a
highway through which all the information processed by the FCD-E1LC flows.
The information is deposited and collected in discrete time intervals, called
timeslots (one timeslot supports a data rate of 64 kbps – see Appendix C). The
TDM bus consists of two lines:
TSER line – carries the transmit data to the main link interface. The other
interfaces deposit data on this line, in the timeslots specified by the
management subsystem.
RSER line – carries the data received by the main link interface. The other
interfaces read their data from the timeslots specified by the
management subsystem.
Each FCD-E1LC port deposits payload information received through its
external interface on one TDM bus line, and simultaneously collects the
information to be sent through the external interface from the other line.
Therefore, considerable flexibility is available with respect to routing, because
each port has access to all the payload information, and can be instructed by
the management subsystem to read and write the desired information in the
desired timeslots of the FCD-E1LC TDM bus.
• Clock bus, which carries the various clock signals used by the FCD-E1LC
system. The FCD-E1LC can lock its system (nodal) clock to various clock
signals applied to its ports, in accordance with the application requirements.
• Two management buses:
Address bus – carries routing information from the management
subsystem to the other subsystems.
Data bus – carries the internal management data.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Functional Description 1-7

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

Main Link Interface

The main link interface includes a framer and an LIU (line interface unit). The
characteristics and the main functions of the main link interface are described
below.

Main Link Interface Characteristics

The FCD-E1LC main link meets the applicable requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.703,
G.704, G.706, G.732, G.823 and G.826.
The main link port is terminated in an RJ-45 eight-pin connector that supports
two interfaces: 120Ω balanced line interface and 75Ω unbalanced interface.
Normally, the main link uses the balanced interface; to use the unbalanced
interface, all that is needed is to connect the appropriate RJ-45-to-BNC adapter
cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X (offered by RAD). In this case, the interface is
automatically changed and the user’s equipment can be connected to standard
BNC female connectors at the free end of the adapter cable.
The line code is HDB3. The operating mode of the main link interface, DSU or LTU,
is user-selectable. In the DSU mode, the maximum line attenuation is up to 10 dB;
in the LTU mode, the maximum line attenuation is up to 36 dB, which for typical
cables translates to a range of up to 2 km. This allows the FCD-E1LC to be placed
at a distance of up to 2 km.
The interface supports both G732N framing (2 per multiframe) and G732S
framing (16 frames per multiframe, also called timeslot 16 multiframes), in
accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.704 and G.732. The user can also configure the
main link to use the CRC-4 function in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.704. The use
of the CRC-4 function, as well as the framing mode, is user-selectable.
FCD-E1LC main link can also be operated in an unframed mode, to generate an
ITU-T Rec. G.703 unframed signal. In this mode, FCD-E1LC accepts a 2048 kbps
data stream through a synchronous data channel (or from the optional sublink)
and converts it to an ITU-T Rec. G.703 unframed signal for transport over the E1
main link.

Framer
The transmit path of the framer generates the E1 frame structure transmitted by the
main link port, in accordance with the selected framing mode. The frame structure is
generated by combining the data retrieved from the prescribed timeslots of the TSER
line with the framing overhead, when the main link-framing mode is G732S or
G732N. The TSER line may also carry inband management data generated by the
management subsystem Unused timeslots are filled with a user-selected idle code.
The receive path of the framer extracts the payload data, the inband
management data stream and demultiplexes the incoming E1 data stream.
The framer also collects performance statistics based on framing errors, bipolar
coding violations and errors detected by the CRC-4 monitoring function. These
statistics can be read by the FCD-E1LC management subsystem.

1-8 Functional Description FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Note When the main link is operated in the unframed mode, the framer is bypassed. In
this mode, the main link transparently transfers the data stream received from
one of the data channels. The appropriate data channel is automatically selected:
channel 1 for an FCD-E1LC with one data channel, and channel 2 for an FCD-E1LC
with two data channels.
Note that when the optional sublink operates in the unframed mode, it is also
automatically bypassed to the main link, but in this case all the other FCD-E1LC
ports are disabled.

Handling of National Bits

FCD-E1LC enables you to control the handling of the national bits, Sa4 through Sa8,
in timeslot 0. You can select the utilization and state of each bit, in accordance
with the following options:
• Transfer of management traffic: when the inband management traffic is
carried in timeslot 0, the user can select the Sa bits that will carry the traffic.
• Setting any Sa bit to the desired fixed value, “0” or “1”.

LIU
The transmit path of the LIU includes an HDB3 coder, which converts the NRZ
transmit data stream provided by the E1 framer to the line code specified for use
on E1 links, and then generates the E1 transmit signal in accordance with
ITU-T Rec. G.703.
The receive path of the LIU recovers the received E1 signal and the associated
clock signal. The recovered clock signal is used by other FCD-E1LC circuits, and is
also applied on the clock bus. The recovered E1 signal is decoded by an HDB3
decoder, and sent to the receive path of the E1 framer in NRZ format.
The operating mode of the LIU receive path, DSU or LTU, is user-selectable.
The HDB3 decoder can provide performance statistics for evaluating line
transmission quality even when the CRC-4 option is not used, by collecting data
on the bipolar violations (BPVs) detected in the incoming signal.

Sublink Interface
The optional sublink interface has characteristics similar to that of the main link
interface. The only difference is in wiring: the transmit and receive pairs in the
sublink RJ-45 connector are reversed relative to the main link, thereby enabling
connection of equipment with standard balanced interface by means of a straight
(point-to-point) cable. Therefore, a different adapter cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1
(also offered by RAD), is needed to use the unbalanced interface.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Functional Description 1-9

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

Synchronous Data Channels

Data Channel Interface Characteristics

The FCD-E1LC data channel is available with one of the following types of
interfaces: RS-530, V.35, X.21, or V.36/RS-449. All versions are supplied with a
25-pin D-type female connector.
V.24 interface equipment connects to the RS-232 port of the FCD-E1LC using a
standard straight cable.
All other interface versions are terminated in a 25-pin D-type female connector.
The conversion between the 25-pin channel interface connector and the standard
V.36, V.35, or X.21 interface connectors is made by means of adapter cables:
• V.36 interface: the adapter cable is terminated in a 37-pin D-type female
connector.
• V.35 interface: the adapter cable is terminated in a 34-pin female connector.
• X.21 interface: the adapter cable is terminated in a 15-pin D-type female
connector.
Suitable adapter cables can be ordered from RAD.
The data channel interface supports the following control lines:
• RTS – input from the local user’s equipment.
• CTS – output to the local user’s equipment. This line can be configured to be
always in the active state, or track the state of the RTS line.
• DSR – the DSR line is always active when the FCD-E1LC is powered, except
when a remote loopback is activated on the main link.
• DCD – the DCD line is active when the FCD-E1LC main link interface is
synchronized.

Data Channel Processing

The data channel operates as a synchronous port, which connects to the TDM
bus via a bus interface. The data channel performs two main functions:
• In the output (receive) direction, the bus interface reads the payload data
from the appropriate timeslots of the TSER line, under the control of the
management subsystem, and generates a continuous n × 64 kbps or
n × 56 kbps data stream. The data stream is accompanied by a clock signal
derived from the internal FCD-E1LC system clock.
The transmit data and clock signals are then applied to the channel interface,
which provides the interface to the external (user’s) equipment.
• In the input (transmit) direction, the user’s data applied to the input of the
channel interface is placed in the appropriate timeslots of the RSER line,
under the control of the management subsystem.
To enable synchronous operation, FIFO buffers are used to absorb timing
variations (jitter, wander, etc.). In all the data channel timing modes, the FIFO

1-10 Functional Description FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

size is automatically selected in accordance with the data channel rate, as listed
in Table 1-1.
The values listed in Table 1-1 are selected in accordance with the limits specified
in the applicable standards.
In addition, when using the DTE2 mode, the FIFO size can also be manually
selected, to enable the user to increase FIFO size when the jitter exceeds the
expected limits.
Table 1-1. FIFO Size vs. Data Channel Rate

Data Channel Rate (kbps) FIFO Size (bits)

64 ±16
128 and 192 ±30
256 through 512 ±52
576 through 1024 ±72
1088 through 1792 ±52
1856 and 1920 ±30
1984 ±16

In addition to payload data, the data channel interfaces handle two additional
types of signals:
• Clock signals. The direction of the clock signals depends on the data channel
timing mode, DCE, DTE1, or DTE2. The timing modes are explained in the
Synchronous Data Channel Timing section on page 1-14.
In the DTE2 mode, the clock signal applied to the transmit input is connected
to the clock bus and can be selected as an FCD-E1LC system timing reference.
• Handshaking signals. The handshaking signals are used to control the
exchange of signals with the user’s equipment, in accordance with the
protocol applying to the installed data channel interface. The handshaking is
performed under the control of the management subsystem.
The functions of the handshaking signals are explained on page 1-10.

Asynchronous Data Channel RS-232/V.24

This interface allows FCD-E1LC to operate opposite external user equipment at bit
rates 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, or 38.4 kbps. The data rate of the V.24 port can be
selected between 64 kbps and 128 kbps.

Ethernet Interface
The FCD-E1LC can be ordered with a full-feature Ethernet switch with VLAN
support that provides remote bridge services.
The Ethernet switch has a 10/100BaseT interface terminated in a shielded RJ-45
connector for direct connection to LANs.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Functional Description 1-11

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

Ethernet Port Interface Characteristics

The Ethernet port 10/100Base-T LAN interface supports auto-negotiation.
However, the user can also disable auto-negotiation and specify directly the
operating rate (10 or 100 Mbps) and operating mode (half-duplex or full-duplex).
The auto-negotiation process uses a standard protocol that permits intelligent
10/100BaseT Ethernet ports to automatically select the mode providing the
highest possible traffic handling capability. Therefore, when auto-negotiation is
enabled, the Ethernet port automatically selects the appropriate operating mode
as soon as it is connected to a LAN or to another Ethernet port.
The following additional capabilities are also available:
• Automatic detection and correction of MDI/MDIX crossover and polarity,
which enables connecting the FCD-E1LC Ethernet port to any other port
(station or hub) by any type of cable (straight or cross-wired)
• Use of 802.3 flow control in the full-duplex mode and backpressure flow
control in the half-duplex mode.
The timing mode of the Ethernet channel interface is always DCE (that is, within
the FCD-E1LC the timing of the receive and transmit Ethernet channel paths is
always locked to the FCD-E1LC system clock).

Ethernet Switch Description

The FCD-E1LC includes an Ethernet switch with VLAN support that fully complies
with the IEEE 802.3/Ethernet V.2 standards, has user-selectable forwarding
algorithms, and provides extensive support for QoS features.
The Ethernet switch has two ports:
• An external port connected to the Ethernet (LAN) interface of the FCD-E1LC,
supported by a MAC controller that performs all the functions required by the
IEEE 802.3 protocol.
• An internal port connected to the main link interface of the FCD-E1LC, which
can be assigned timeslots in accordance with the desired throughput. This
port supports the HDLC protocol.
The frames passed by the MAC controller are transferred to an internal queue
controller, which controls the frame egress priorities and inserts them in two
separate queues.

Flow Control Options

The user can enable flow control. Flow control is available in both the half-duplex
and full-duplex modes:
• In the half-duplex mode, flow control uses a collision-based scheme to
throttle the connected stations when the free buffer space of the FCD-E1LC
Ethernet port is too low, to avoid discarding frames during congestion (this
approach is called back pressure). When the buffer space of the port is
almost full, its MAC controller forces a collision in the input port when an
incoming frame is sensed (the alternative, without flow control, is to discard
the incoming frame).

1-12 Functional Description FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

• In the full-duplex mode, the standard flow control method defined in IEEE
802.3x is used. This method is based on pause frames and enables stopping
and restoring the transmission from the remote node. However, this method
can only be used when auto-negotiation is enabled on the port, and the node
attached to the port supports pause frames.

Forwarding Algorithms
The Ethernet switch operates as a MAC bridge that automatically learns the MAC
addresses located on the local LAN.
The Ethernet switch LAN table can store up to 2048 MAC addresses. Only active
MAC addresses are actually stored: after a user-defined aging interval, inactive
addresses are removed from the switch memory.

VLAN and QoS Support

The Ethernet switch can use the priority information carried in the VLAN tag or
the type of service (ToS) precedence for frames carrying IP packets to select the
priority with which traffic will be forwarded:
• If the frame is tagged, the switch uses the priority value carried by the VLAN
tag to determine the output queue to which the frame is transferred
• If the frame is not tagged but carries an IP packet, the switch uses the
precedence value carried in the ToS field to determine the output queue to
which the frame is transferred
• Other untagged frames are transferred to the low-priority queue.
Table 1-2 lists the queuing priorities.

Table 1-2. Output Queuing Priorities

Priority in VLAN Tag Precedence in ToS Filed Output Queue

(Tagged Frames) (Untagged Frames)

7, 6, 5, 4 7, 6, 5, 4 High priority

3, 2, 1, 0 3, 2, 1, 0 Low priority

The switch uses the weighted fair queue scheduling mode: 2:1 weighting is
applied to the two priorities, that is, when the output queues are full, 2 frames
are egressed from the high priority queue for each frame in the low priority
queue. This approach prevents the lower priority frames from being starved out
with only a slightly increased delay to the higher priority frames.

Timing
Multiple clock source selection provides maximum system timing flexibility, and
supports hierarchical dissemination of timing information.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Functional Description 1-13

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

System Timing
Internally, the FCD-E1LC uses one timing source (clock). This system clock
determines the transmit timing of the E1 main and sublinks and user channels,
and the timing of most other signal processing operations.
To achieve maximum flexibility in system integration and enable hierarchical
distribution of timing in the system, the FCD-E1LC enables you to select the
source to which the master clock is locked. The available options are as follows:
• Reference source locked to the recovered receive clock of the main link.
• Reference source locked to the recovered receive clock of the sublink.
• Reference source locked to an external clock (such as the transmit clock
applied to a data channel using the DTE2 mode).

Note The DTE2 mode is not available when the data channel uses the X.21 interface.
The Ethernet interface cannot be used as a reference source.

• System clock source locked to the internal crystal oscillator, which has an
accuracy of ±50 ppm.
In addition to the selection of a master clock source, you can specify a fallback
source, which is automatically selected in case the master source fails. The fail
criteria are loss of the receive signal on the port selected as the master source,
or inactive RTS line on the data channels. The internal oscillator always serves as
a fallback source, which is automatically selected in case the other selected
timing sources fail.

Main Link Timing

FCD-E1LC recovers the main link receive clock signal, and uses it as the timing
source for the receive path. The main link transmit timing source, which is derived
from the main system clock, can be locked to one of the following sources:
• Recovered receive clock
• External clock signal derived from one of the synchronous data channels)
• Sublink recovered receive clock
• Internal oscillator.

Sublink Timing
FCD-E1LC recovers the sublink receive clock signal, and uses it as the timing
source for the receive path. The sublink transmit timing source is always derived
from the main system clock.

Synchronous Data Channel Timing

The FCD-E1LC data channel has three timing modes:
• DCE – transmit and receive clock for the user’s equipment connected to the
data channel are derived from the main system clock.

1-14 Functional Description FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

• DTE1 – the data channel sends the receive data accompanied by the receive
clock, derived from the main system clock, to the user’s equipment
connected to the data channel, and accepts user’s data according to the
user’s equipment transmit clock.
• DTE2 – FCD-E1LC transmits and receives data according to the clock signals
provided by the equipment connected to the data channel. When using this
clocking mode, the main link clock is locked to the clock signal supplied by the
user’s data channel interface. The DTE2 mode is not available on channels
with X.21 interfaces.
FCD-E1LC provides a FIFO buffer for the data channel, to absorb timing
differences. FIFO size is generally automatically selected, however, in the DTE2
timing mode the user can increase the FIFO size beyond the automatically
selected value, to meet specific system requirements.

V.24 Data Channel Timing

The V.24 data channel operates only in the DCE timing mode.

Ethernet Port Timing

The timing of the Ethernet processing circuits is always derived from the main
system clock (“DCE” timing). This port cannot be selected as a timing source.

Diagnostics
FCD-E1LC has comprehensive diagnostics capabilities that include the following
types of loopbacks and tests:
• Main link:
Local analog loopback
Remote analog loopback
Local digital loopback
Remote digital loopback
Inband-activated loopback in the desired timeslots (both transmission to
a remote unit, and activation/deactivation in response to an inband
loopback code)
BER testing in the desired timeslots. To provide compatibility with other
BER testing equipment, the user can select the pattern used for the test
from a wide range of patterns, including standard pseudorandom
patterns.
• Sublink:
Local analog loopback
Remote analog loopback
Local digital loopback
Remote digital loopback

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Functional Description 1-15

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

• Serial data channels: local and remote loopbacks.

Timeslot Handling
When operating in any of the framed modes, FCD-E1LC allows you to configure
the routing of the individual timeslots for the data channels (including the
Ethernet interface) and for the sublink. The routing can be modified during
system operation, without disrupting the service to users of timeslots that are
not rerouted. FCD-E1LC automatically connects the timeslots in both the receive
and transmit directions.
You can either individually select the main link timeslots in which the user’s data
is to be inserted, or can use the “bundle” routing mode. Timeslots connected to
data channels are always defined as data timeslots.
To help you route timeslots correctly, FCD-E1LC automatically checks the validity of
your inputs, and reports, by means of error messages, inconsistencies and invalid
selections. The conditions reported include:
• Attempt to allocate to user’s traffic timeslots that must be reserved for
system use: timeslot 16 when G732S multiframes are used, or a timeslot
dedicated to the management traffic between two FCD-E1LC units connected
in a link.
• Total bandwidth requested exceeds the available main link bandwidth:
Maximum possible – 31 timeslots.
Maximum 30 timeslots when using G732S framing, or G732N framing with
a timeslot dedicated to management.
Maximum 29 timeslots when using G732S framing and a timeslot
dedicated to management.
When a sublink is installed, the available main link bandwidth is reduced by
the number of timeslots configured as the sublink payload.
• Number of timeslots assigned to the data channel(s) does not match the
number required to support the selected data rate.

Management Subsystem
The management subsystem controls FCD-E1LC operation, in accordance with its
operating software. The management subsystem also includes an SNMP agent,
and a proprietary IP router for SNMP management traffic.
The database management, as well as the other configuration, test and
monitoring activities (equipment status reading, alarm status and history,
activation of test loops, reading of performance statistics, etc.) can be performed
in three ways:
• Supervision Terminal − A “dumb” ASCII terminal connected to the RS-232 port
of the FCD-E1LC (or a PC running a terminal emulation program), controlled
by the program stored in the FCD-E1LC, can be used as a supervision
terminal. FCD-E1LC supports both point-to-point and multidrop connections.

1-16 Functional Description FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

• SNMP Management − The SNMP management capability enables fully

graphical, user-friendly management using the RADview network
management stations offered by RAD, as well as management by other
SNMP-based management systems.
• Telnet − Remote management is also possible using the Telnet
communication protocol, which uses TCP/IP communication, without the
SNMP service. Telnet support enables a remote IP host to control the
operation of FCD-E1LC using functions identical to those provided by a
supervision terminal.
The communication between the management system and FCD-E1LC can take
place out-of-band (by connecting to the serial management port) or inband
(through the main link). FCD-E1LC includes a proprietary IP router for
management traffic. This function enables FCD-E1LC to transfer management
traffic generated by, or addressed to, other FCD-E1LC units, and also inband
management traffic addressed to other RAD equipment that operates over E1
links, such as the Megaplex modular TDM E1/T1 multiplexers, DXC multiservice
access nodes, etc.

Dial-In and Dial-Out Capabilities

FCD-E1LC supports dial-in/dial-out operations, which can be used for remote
out-of-band configuration and monitoring (dial-in). For dial-out operation
FCD-E1LC activates the modem to automatically dial a pre-programmed number
whenever an alarm event occurs.
The remote out-of-band configuration, monitoring and sending callout alarm
messages can be done using the ASCII (terminal), PPP or SLIP protocols.

Alarms
FCD-E1LC stores alarms detected during its operation in a buffer that can hold up
to 100 alarms. During regular operation, an alarm indicator on the front panel is
used to notify the local operator that alarm conditions have been detected.
Separate indications are provided for major and minor alarms. The local operator
can then review the contents of the alarm buffer using the supervision terminal,
a Telnet host, or a management station.
The front-panel LED indicators display in real time the status of the main and
sublinks, and alert when test loops are present in the system. FCD-E1LC can also
automatically report alarms to a remote terminal using a dial-up modem. Alarms
causing dial-out activities are user-selectable.
The alarms stored in the FCD-E1LC alarm buffer can be transmitted automatically
through the serial management access port, for display on a supervision terminal;
when SNMP management is used, alarms are also sent to user-selected
management stations as traps.
The CONTROL DCE port can be configured to operate as a dial-out port, for
automatic reporting of alarms to remote locations. The port is intended for
connection to a Hayes™ or Hayes-compatible dial-up modem. You can program
the reporting method in accordance with the following options:
• Always send a report whenever a new alarm condition is detected.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Functional Description 1-17

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

• Send a report only upon the detection of a major alarm.

• Reporting disabled (no dial-out function).
When it is necessary to report an alarm condition, FCD-E1LC initiates the call
setup, and then, after the destination answers, sends the complete contents of
the alarm buffer. Following the transmission of the alarm buffer contents,
FCD-E1LC disconnects automatically.
To increase reporting reliability, you can define the number of dialing retries, and
an alternate directory number to be called in case the primary directory number
cannot be reached. If nevertheless the call cannot be established, the full
contents of the buffer will be sent the next time a call is set up.
To expedite the handling of alarms and reduce the information load during
system malfunctions, the system operator can mask alarm conditions, to prevent
continuous reporting of known alarm conditions, e.g., during maintenance
activities.

Statistics Collection
FCD-E1LC collects and stores E1 port statistics in compliance with ITU-T Rec.
G.706, G.826, with local support as per RFC 1406.
These statistics can be retrieved either from the management station (RADview),
or via the supervision terminal.
The management subsystem exchanges information and sends commands
through several ports:
• The communication with the various internal subsystems of the FCD-E1LC is
performed through the management address and data buses. The subsystem
also controls the front-panel indicators.
• The communication with the supervision terminal is performed through the
front panel RS-232 serial port interface. This port is used to perform the
initial configuration of the FCD-E1LC, using any standard ASCII (“dumb”)
terminal (or PC running a basic communication or terminal emulation
program). After the initial configuration, the port can be used to control and
monitor FCD-E1LC operation.
• When inband management is enabled, the management subsystem transmits
and receives management traffic through the E1 main and/or sub port. The
communication with the E1 port is made through the TDM bus.

Power Supply Subsystem

FCD-E1LC has a universal wide-range power supply, which enables operating on
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, or -48/-60 VDC.

1-18 Functional Description FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

1.5 Timing Considerations

Main Link Timing Application

Figure 1-5 shows a typical application in which FCD-E1LC is operated with the
main link as the timing reference source, and illustrates the flow of timing signals
within the system.
User's DTE FCD-E1LC

DCE ML
Timing Timing FCD-E1LC
User's DTE

E1
Network DTE1 Loopback
User's DTE FCD-E1LC Timing Timing

DCE ML
Timing Timing

Master Timing
Source

Figure 1-5. Main Link Timing, Flow of Timing Signals in a Typical Application
When using the main link as the timing reference, the data channels must use
DCE timing. However, DTE1 timing can also be used, provided the user’s
equipment connected to the data channels operates with loopback timing, that
is, the user’s equipment must lock its transmit clock to the receive clock provided
by FCD-E1LC.
FIFO buffers are used on the data channels, to absorb small timing variations
(jitter, wander, etc.). FIFO size is automatically selected in accordance with the
data channel rate, as listed in Table 1-1.
The main link timing mode is particularly suitable for FCD-E1LC units connected to
an E1 network which has an accurate master timing source (e.g., PTT or national
network), because it enables locking the timing of the equipment connected to
the FCD-E1LC units to the network timing.

Data Channel Timing Application

Figure 1-6 shows a typical application, which uses the data channel operating in
the DTE2 timing mode, as the timing reference source, and illustrates the flow of
timing signals within the system.
In the application shown in Figure 1-6, the data equipment located on the
customer’s premises uses the FCD-E1LC link to connect to a data network. Since
data networks include accurate timing sources and do not accept data whose
timing deviates significantly from the network timing, it is necessary to ensure
that the equipment located on the customer’s premises uses the data network
timing.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Timing Considerations 1-19

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

For this purpose, the FCD-E1LC connected to the data network uses the data
channel as its timing source, and therefore its main link timing is locked to the
data network timing.
The FCD-E1LC located on the customer’s premises uses main link timing. As a
result, its system timing is also locked to the data network timing, and the network
timing is transferred to the data equipment located on the customer’s premises.
To optimize jitter performance, the FIFO size of a data channel operating in the
DTE2 mode can be selected manually (±16 bits, ±30 bits, ±52 bits, or ±72 bits).
The manually selected value cannot be less that the automatically selected
values, which are listed in Table 1-1.
FCD-E1LC
DTE2
Timing
Data
Network Data
Channel

E1
Network

Customer Premises

FCD-E1LC
Data User's DTE
Channel

ML Timing DCE Timing

Figure 1-6. Data Channel Timing, Flow of Timing Signals in a Typical Application

1.6 System Management Considerations

System Management Method

The FCD-E1LC system is designed for unattended operation. The configuration of
the FCD-E1LC system, that is, a complete collection of operating parameters, is
determined by a database stored in non-volatile memory located in the
management subsystem. The database is automatically loaded upon FCD-E1LC
turn-on, thereby enabling the FCD-E1LC to automatically return to its last
operating configuration.
In addition, FCD-E1LC stores a set of factory-default parameters, which can be
used to start the configuration of a new FCD-E1LC unit; the default parameters
can also be loaded in case the user’s database is corrupted.
FCD-E1LC database management, as well as the other configuration, test and
monitoring activities (equipment status reading, alarm status and history,

1-20 System Management Considerations FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

activation of test loops, reading of performance statistics, etc.) can be performed

in three ways:
• Supervision Terminal
• SNMP Management
• Telnet.

Management Access Options

The control subsystem of FCD-E1LC systems supports both out-of-band and
inband management access.
• For out-of-band management, the connection is made through the front
panel serial port, via the SLIP or PPP protocol. The routing is performed with a
RAD proprietary routing protocol.
• Inband management is performed via the main E1 link, and/or the sublink
(optional). See Appendix B for details.

Supervision Terminal Capabilities

The supervision terminal provides a simple, command-line based human interface.
The terminals can communicate with the managed FCD-E1LC systems via the
CONTROL DCE serial RS-232 communication port.
The serial port is generally configured as a DCE port, for direct connection to a
terminal, but can also be configured as a DTE port when it is necessary to
connect the terminal via a modem link, or a low-speed data multiplexer channel.
Thus, a remote operator located at a central site can perform all the functions
available from a supervision terminal directly connected to the FCD-E1LC system.
Optional password protection is also available.
The communication data rate of the serial port can be selected in accordance with
system requirements (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or
115200 bps). Automatic data rate identification (Autobaud function) is also
available. Data word format is configurable: one start bit, eight data bits, selectable
parity (odd, even, or none), and one or two stop bit.
Since continuous communication with the FCD-E1LC system is necessary only
when management activities are actually performed, one terminal can manage
multiple FCD-E1LC units using a polling protocol, with the connection to the
individual units being made by means of multi-drop modems or digital sharing
devices. For polling purposes, each FCD-E1LC can be assigned an eight-bit
address, for a maximum of 255 nodes (the zero address is reserved for
non-polled communication).

SNMP Management Capabilities

The FCD-E1LC system includes an SNMP agent that can communicate out-of-band
and/or inband through the dedicated management router of the FCD-E1LC system.
To permit SNMP management, you must configure and enable the SNMP agent.
Appendix B provides information on the required parameters.
A basic management topology is shown in Figure 1-7. In this example, a network
management station is attached to an Ethernet LAN. A remote access LAN
extender, MBE-RAS/A, is located near the managed equipment (e.g., FCD-E1LC,

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 System Management Considerations 1-21

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

Megaplex-2100, etc.), and its serial ports are connected via cables to the serial
port of the FCD-E1LC CONTROL DCE connector using the SLIP protocol.
The MBE-RAS extender can connect up to 8 FCD-E1LC devices to one
management system.
LAN

To CONTROL
Connectors of
Managed Equipment

. . . . Serial Ports

MBE/RAS/A

Figure 1-7. Basic Management Topology Using Network Management Station Attached to LAN
The dedicated management traffic routers of the FCD-E1LC systems, and of the
other RAD equipment, are able to determine network topology in accordance with
the capabilities of the routing algorithm, without requiring the user to provide a
priori topology information on the network. Moreover, the routing algorithm also
supports automatic switching to an alternate route in case the currently selected
route fails. The dedicated router operates on the inband traffic; you can also
enable the routing of out-of-band traffic.

Combining Inband and Out-of-Band Management Capabilities

The advanced capabilities of the FCD-E1LC SNMP agents allow easy integration of
the FCD-E1LC system in wide-area managed communication systems. Its
capabilities support any practical communication network topology, as illustrated
in the example shown in Figure 1-8.
In Figure 1-8, the network management station attached to the FCD-E1LC system
can manage, using inband communication over the user-selected links, all the
units (another FCD-E1LC unit, and several Megaplex-2100 units), connected to
the remote ends of the corresponding links. Thus, an entire wide-area network
can be managed by means of a network management station connected to any
FCD-E1LC unit (or to any of the other RAD equipment, which supports SNMP
management).

1-22 System Management Considerations FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Megaplex
System 5 SP-DTE

To other
FCD-E1LC
Systems
SP-DCE

Megaplex
System 4

SP-DCE

Remote
Communication
Node
DXC-30

Main
Link

FCD-E1LC

Network
Management
Station

Figure 1-8. Extended Management Topology Using Network Management Stations

Remote Management using Telnet over IP

The FCD-E1LC system supports the Telnet communication protocol, which enables
any IP host to access the FCD-E1LC system supervision facility using TCP/IP
communication. The Telnet user has access to the same command-line interface
that is available to the user of a supervision terminal, but it uses the management
topologies described above for SNMP.

Prevention of Access Conflicts

The FCD-E1LC system has a dedicated mechanism that prevents access conflicts
when more than one management mode is active.
Table 1-3 lists FCD-E1LC response to multiple-access conditions.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 System Management Considerations 1-23

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

Table 1-3. Handling of Management Access Conflicts

Type of First Response to Second Access

Access Telnet Inband Telnet Supervision
Out-of-Band Terminal

Telnet Inband Message Ignored Message

Telnet Message Ignored Ignored

Out-of-Band

Supervision Disconnects Not possible Ignored

Terminal the terminal

1.7 Technical Specifications

E1 Main and Compliance ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732, G.826
Sublinks

Framing • G732N, 2 frames per multiframe, CRC-4

option disabled
• G732N, 2 frames per multiframe, CRC-4
option enabled
• G732S, 16 frames per multiframe, CRC-4
option disabled
• G732S, 16 frames per multiframe, CRC-4
option enabled
• Unframed

Data Rate 2.048 Mbps (±50ppm)

Line Code HDB3

Interface Type Balanced or unbalanced, with automatic

selection in accordance with the connected
cable

Line Impedance

Balanced interface 120Ω

Unbalanced interface 75Ω

Transmit level

Balanced Interface ±3V ±10%

Unbalanced Interface ±2.37V ±10%

1-24 Technical Specifications FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Receive level

LTU (long haul) mode 0 to -36 dB

DSU (short haul) mode 0 to -10 dB

Jitter Performance Per ITU-T Rec. G.823

Connector RJ-45 (ISO 10173) 8-pin connector

Timing

Receive timing Always recovered from received line signal

Transmit timing
(user-selectable)

Internal ±50 ppm oscillator

External timing User-selectable source:

• Locked to the transmit clock of the data
channel
• Locked to the recovered receive main link
clock
• Locked to the recovered receive clock of
the sublink (optional)
Allowed range: ±50 ppm

Loopback timing Locked to the recovered receive clock, allowed

range ±50 ppm

Synchronous User Data Channel Interface RS-530 (also supports V.35, V.36/RS-449), or
Data Channels X.21, according to order.
V .35, V.36/RS-449, X.21 supported by means
of adapter cables

Data Channel Connectors • RS-530 interface: 25-pin D-type female

• V.35 interface: 34-pin female via adapter
cable
• V.36/RS-449 interface: 37-pin D-type
female via adapter cable
• X.21 interface: 15-pin, D-type female via
adapter cable

Data Rates User-selectable, n×64 kbps or n×56 kbps,

where n equals 1, 2, 3, ....., 31

Timing Modes

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Technical Specifications 1-25

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

DCE Receive and transmit clocks to the

synchronous DTE

DTE1 Receive clock to the synchronous device, and

transmit clock from the synchronous device

DTE2 Receive and transmit clock from the

synchronous DCE (not supported with the X.21
interface)

Control Signals • CTS follows RTS or constantly ON, software

selectable
• DSR constantly ON, except during the
remote main link loopback
• DCD constantly ON, except during loss of
synchronization alarm on main link

Timeslot Assignment • Sequential timeslots (bundled)

• User-defined

V.24 Interface V.24

Asynchronous
User Data Port

Connectors 25-pin D-type female

Bit Rates 64 kbps or 128 kbps. Allows operation

opposite external user equipment at bit rates
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, or 38.4 kbps

Timing Mode DCE: receive and transmit clocks to the

asynchronous DTE

Control Signals CTS follows RTS or constantly ON, software

selectable
DSR constantly ON, except during the remote
main link loopback
DCD constantly ON, except during loss of
synchronization alarm on main link

Timeslot allocation Sequential timeslots (bundled)

User-defined

Ethernet Port Compatibility Relevant sections of IEEE 802.3u, 802.3x,

802.1p and 802.3q

Data Rate • 10BaseT: 10 Mbps

• 100Base-Tx: 100 Mbps
• Auto-negotiation

1-26 Technical Specifications FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Internal LAN Traffic Ethernet switch with one external port, and
Processing one WAN port (toward the network, via the
main link).
Supports QoS using tag-based VLAN priority or
IP ToS precedence

LAN Table 2048 MAC addresses with configurable

automatic aging (default – 5 minutes)

Connector RJ-45, shielded

Supervisory and Interface V.24/RS-232 (asynchronous)

Management Port
Port Connector 9-pin D-type female

Data Rates 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,

57600, or 115200 bps, with automatic
detection of data rate (Autobaud)

Data Word Format • One start bit

• 7 or 8 data bits
• Even, odd, or no parity
• One stop bit

Dial-in Capabilities Supports all the supervisory port functions

Dial-out Capabilities Automatic reporting of alarms to remote

locations; alarms causing dial-out activities are
user-selectable

Management Full control over FCD-E1LC operation via the

DCE CONTROL port, using supervision
(“dumb”) terminal, SNMP (SLIP), or Telnet
(SLIP), remote monitoring and remote data
collection

Inband Remote • Through timeslot 0 (any sequence of Sa4

Management through Sa8 bits) using proprietary
protocol with dynamic routing
• Through dedicated timeslot using reliable
proprietary protocol

Out-of-Band Remote SLIP or PPP protocol

Management

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Technical Specifications 1-27

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

Diagnostics Test Loops • E1 main link local analog loopback

• E1 main link local digital loopback
• E1 main link remote analog loopback
• E1 main link remote digital loopback
• E1 sublink local analog loopback
• E1 sublink local digital loopback
• E1 sublink remote analog loopback
• E1 sublink remote digital loopback
• Data channel local loopback
• Data channel remote loopback
• BER test on selected timeslots of the main
link
• Inband FT1/FE1 code-activated loopback on
the main link
Note: No loopback can be activated for the
Ethernet interface.

Statistics Collection As per ITU-T Rec. G.706, G.826 with local

support as per RFC 4016

Alarms Alarm Buffer Alarm buffer size: 100 alarms. Last 100 alarms
are stored and available for retrieval.
Each alarm is time stamped (internal clock
without battery backup – must be set to
correct time after turn-off or power failure)

Indicators Front Panel Indicators PWR – FCD-E1LC is powered (green)

SYNC LOSS LOC MAIN – Loss of local
synchronization alarm on the main link (red)
SYNC LOSS REM MAIN – Loss of remote
synchronization alarm on the main link (red)
SYNC LOSS LOC SUB – Loss of local
synchronization alarm on the sublink (red)
SYNC LOSS REM SUB – Loss of remote
synchronization alarm on the sublink (red)
TST – test active (yellow)
ALM – alarm indication (red)

Rear Panel Ethernet • LINK (green) – LAN link integrity

Interface Indicators • ACT (yellow) – LAN data activity
• 100M – operation at 100 Mbps

1-28 Technical Specifications FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Physical Height 43.7 mm (1.7 in) (1U)

Characteristics
Width 43.2 cm (19 in)

Depth 24.3 cm (9.5 in)

Weight (approx.) 0.9 kg (2.0 lb)

Power Supply Voltage

AC source 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

DC source -48 VDC or -60 VDC (-40 to -72 VDC)

Power Consumption 5W max.

Environment Operating Temperature 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)

Relative Humidity Up to 90%, non-condensing

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Technical Specifications 1-29

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-30 Technical Specifications FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Chapter 2
Installation and Setup

2.1 Introduction

Scope
This chapter provides installation instructions for the FCD-E1LC.
The chapter presents the following information:
• Safety precautions for installation personnel and users
• Site requirements
• General description of equipment enclosures, the available interface options,
and the FCD-E1LC panels
• Mechanical and electrical installation instructions for the FCD-E1LC
• Operation procedures (including turn-on, normal indications and turn-off).
After installing the system, it is necessary to configure it in accordance with the
specific user's requirements. The preliminary system configuration is performed
by means of a supervision terminal directly connected to the FCD-E1LC
(procedures for using the terminal are given in Chapter 3). The software
necessary for using the terminal is stored in the FCD-E1LC.
After the preliminary configuration and during routine operations, the FCD-E1LC
can also be managed by means of Telnet hosts or SNMP-based network
management stations, e.g., RADview. Refer to the User's Manual of the network
management station for operating instructions; Telnet hosts use the supervision
terminal procedures.

Safety Precautions

No internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, and repairs may be performed by

either the operator or the user; such activities may be performed only by skilled
service personnel who are aware of the hazards involved.
Warning Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation, and
maintenance of this product.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Introduction 2-1

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

For your protection and to prevent possible damage to equipment when a fault
condition, e.g., a lightning stroke or contact with high-voltage power lines, occurs
on the cables connected to the equipment, the FCD-E1LC unit must be properly
grounded at any time. Any interruption of the protective (grounding) connection
Grounding inside or outside the equipment, or the disconnection of the protective ground
terminal can make this equipment dangerous. Intentional interruption is
prohibited.

Note Before installing the product, review Handling Energized Products at the
beginning of the manual.

Before switching on this equipment and before connecting any other cable, the
protective ground terminal of the FCD-E1LC must be connected to a protective
ground. The grounding connection is made through the power cable. Therefore,
the grounding arrangements depend on the equipment power supply source:
• AC-powered units: the power cable must always be inserted in a socket
outlet provided with a protective ground contact, and the protective action
must not be negated by use of an extension cord (power cable) without a
protective conductor (grounding).
• DC-powered units: the power cable is connected to the FCD-E1LC power
connector through an AC/DC Adapter (AD) available from RAD. Make sure to
connect ground to the AD grounding terminal. The protective action must not
be negated by use of an extension cord (power cable) without a protective
conductor (grounding).
Whenever FCD-E1LC units are installed in a rack, make sure that the rack is
properly grounded and connected to a reliable, low-resistance grounding system.

Dangerous voltages may be present on the cables connected to the FCD-E1LC.

• Never connect cables to an FCD-E1LC unit if it is not properly installed and
grounded.
Warning
• Disconnect all the cables connected to the connectors of the FCD-E1LC before
disconnecting the FCD-E1LC power cable.

The FCD-E1LC does not have a power on/off switch; therefore it will start
Caution operating as soon as it is connected to power.

Caution FCD-E1LC contains components sensitive to ESD. To prevent ESD damage, do not
touch the internal components or connectors.
If you are not using a grounded wrist strap, before touching or performing any
internal settings on the FCD-E1LC, it is recommended to discharge the
electrostatic charge of your body by touching the frame of a grounded
equipment unit.

2-2 Introduction FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Whenever feasible, during installation works use standard ESD protection wrist
straps to discharge electrostatic charges. It is also recommended to use garments
and packaging made of antistatic materials or materials that have high resistivity,
yet are not insulators.
It is also important to make sure that other equipment, in particular customer’s
data equipment connected to FCD-E1LC serial data and Ethernet ports, is properly
grounded (connected to the protective, or safety, ground) before attempting to
connect it to the FCD-E1LC.

2.2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites

Physical Requirements
The FCD-E1LC are intended for installation on desktop and shelves. All the
connections are made to the rear panel.
For installation in 19-inch racks, RAD offers a rack mount (RM) kit. An FCD-E1LC
installed with the RM kit occupies a height of 1U. For installation of one or two
units in a 19-inch rack, refer to the Rack Mounting Kit for 19-inch Racks guide
that comes with the RM kit.

Power Requirements
FCD-E1LC has a wide range AC/DC power supply, and therefore can be powered
either by AC or DC sources:
• AC-powered FCD-E1LC units should be installed within 1.5m (5 feet) of an
easily-accessible grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing 100 to 240 VAC,
50/60 Hz (nominal mains voltage).
• DC-powered FCD-E1LC units require a -48 VDC or -60 VDC (nominal) power
source.

Caution Reversing the DC supply voltage polarity will not damage the FCD-E1LC, but the
internal protection fuse will not function.

Connections
This section presents general requirements regarding the connections to the
various FCD-E1LC interfaces. Note that your unit cannot include all the interfaces
listed below.
If you need specific information regarding pin allocations in the FCD-E1LC
interface connectors and wiring data for adapter cables, refer to Appendix A.

Main and Sublink Connections

FCD-E1LC main and sub ports support two interfaces: 120Ω balanced interface
for operation over two twisted pairs, and 75Ω unbalanced interface for operation

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2-3

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

over coaxial cables. Both interfaces are terminated in an RJ-45 eight-pin

connector.
At any time, only one interface is active. The selection of the interface is
automatically made, in accordance with the cable connected to the port:
• The cable used for connecting to equipment with balanced E1 interface
should include only two twisted pairs, one for the transmit path and the
other for the receive path.

Note One of the contacts in the E1 port connectors is used to sense the connection of
the unbalanced adapter cable (see below). Therefore, do not connect cables with
more than two pairs when you want to use the balanced interface.

• To connect to equipment with unbalanced E1 interface, it is necessary to

convert the FCD-E1LC RJ-45 connector to the standard pair of BNC female
connectors used for unbalanced E1 interfaces. For this purpose, RAD offers
15 cm long adapter cables: CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X for the main link port and
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 for the sublink port. These cables have one RJ-45 plug for
connection to FCD-E1LC connector and two BNC female connectors at the
other end.
Connecting the cable to the FCD-E1LC main or sublink connector will cause
the corresponding interface to switch to the unbalanced mode.
The FCD-E1LC main and sub interfaces must not be directly connected to
unprotected public telecommunication networks. The connection to such
networks must be made through a network termination unit that provides
separation between the interface conductors and the telecommunication network
conductors in accordance with the applicable local regulations.

Serial Data Port Connections

The serial data ports of FCD-E1LC are terminated in a 25-pin D-type female
connector. The interface type is RS-530 (which also supports X.21), V.36/RS-449,
V.24, or V.35, according to the order.
• When using the RS-530 or V.24 interface, equipment with RS-530 or,
respectively, V.24 interface can be directly connected to the data channel
connector using standard cables.
• For the X.21 interface, an adapter cable, terminated in a 15-pin D-type
female connector, is needed.
• For the V.35 interface, an adapter cable, terminated in a 34-pin female
connector, is needed.
• For the V.36/RS-449, an adapter cable, terminated in a 37-pin D-type female
connector, is needed.

Ethernet Port Connections

The optional Ethernet port has a 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface terminated in
an RJ-45 connector, designated 10/100BASE-T.

2-4 Site Requirements and Prerequisites FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

The port supports automatic MDI/MDIX detection and cross-over, and therefore
can be connected by any type of cable (standard or crossed) to any type of
10/100Base-T Ethernet port (station or hub).

CONTROL DCE Port Connections

The CONTROL DCE supervisory port has a 9-pin D-type female connector with
RS-232 interface.
The interface (DCE or DTE) is software-selectable. The default selection, DCE,
enables direct connection to terminals and management stations; when the
interface is configured as DTE, it is necessary to use a crossed adapter cable.

Front and Rear Panel Clearance

Allow at least 90 cm (36 inches) of frontal clearance for operator access.
Allow at least 10 cm (4 inches) clearance at the rear of the unit for interface
cable connections. However, during installation, replacement, and cable
connections, at least 90 cm (36 inches) is needed.

Ambient Requirements
The ambient operating temperature of the FCD-E1LC is 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F),
at a relative humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing.
The FCD-E1LC units are cooled by free air convection; therefore, in rack
installations it is necessary to leave sufficient space (at least 1U) above and
below each unit, to enable free airflow.

2.3 Package Contents

The FCD-E1LC package includes the following items:
• FCD-E1LC unit
• Multiservice Access Devices and Intelligent CLEs CD-ROM
• AC power cord or AC/DC adapter plug (if ordered)
• Rack-mount (RM) kit (if ordered)
• Interface adapter cable(s), in accordance with order.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Package Contents 2-5

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

2.4 Equipment Needed

The cables you need to connect to the FCD-E1LC depend on the FCD-E1LC
application. You can use standard cables or prepare the appropriate cables
yourself in accordance with the information given in Appendix A.
Table 2-1 lists the cables available from RAD for connection of the FCD-E1LC user
synchronous data port to user’s equipment with DTE interfaces. Contact RAD
Technical Support Department if other interface cables are necessary.

Table 2-1. Interface Adapter Cables for FCD-E1LC Data Ports

Cable User Interface Clock Mode Length (m / ft)

CBL-HS2/V/1 V.35 DCE 2/6

CBL-HS2/V/2 V.35 DTE1 2/6

CBL-HS2/V/3 V.35 DTE2 2/6

CBL-HS2/R/1 V.36/RS-449 DCE 2/6

CBL-HS2/R/2 V.36/RS-449 DTE1 2/6

CBL-HS2/R/3 V.36/RS-449 DTE2 2/6

CBL-HS2/X/1 X.21 DCE 2/6

In addition, when using the unbalanced interface for the main and sublink ports,
you may need adapter cables, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X and CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1,
respectively. When using the balanced interface, use cables wired point-to-point,
consisting of two twisted pairs and terminated in RJ-45 connectors.

2.5 FCD-E1LC Enclosures

This section presents a physical description of the various versions of FCD-E1LC
units.

FCD-E1LC Front Panel

Figure 2-1 shows typical FCD-E1LC front panels. The front panel includes only the
2

FCD-E1LC indicators.
Table 2-2 explains the functions of the indicators located on the FCD-E1LC front
3H

panel.

2-6 FCD-E1LC Enclosures FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

A. FCD-E1LC without Sublink

B. FCD-E1LC with Sublink

Figure 2-1. Typical FCD-E1LC Front Panels

Table 2-2. FCD-E1LC Front Panel Indicators

Indicator Function

PWR Indicator (green) Lights when the FCD-E1LC is powered

TST Indicator (yellow) Lights when a test is active

ALM Indicator (red) Flashes to indicate that a major alarm condition is present in the system.
Lights to indicate that the most severe alarm condition present in the system is
a minor alarm
SYNC LOSS – MAIN LOC Lights to indicate local loss of synchronization on the main link
Indicator (red)
SYNC LOSS – MAIN REM Lights to indicate that a remote loss of synchronization indication has been
Indicator (red) received by the main link interface

SYNC LOSS – SUB LOC Lights to indicate local loss of synchronization on the sublink
Indicator (red)
SYNC LOSS – SUB REM Lights to indicate a remote loss of synchronization indication has been received
Indicator (red) by the sublink interface

FCD-E1LC Rear Panels

The components located on the FCD-E1LC rear panels depend on the ordered
interfaces.
Figure 2-2 shows several typical rear panels of FCD-E1LC units. Table 2-3 explains
4H 5H

the functions of the rear panel components.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 FCD-E1LC Enclosures 2-7

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

100 240 VAC/ 48 / 60 VDC CH. 2 10 / 100BASE-T

E1 / T1
E1 / T1 LOOPBACK 100M
LINK ACT
A. SUB MAIN SUB MAIN
CONTROL
ON

LR LR

RETURN POWER DCE CH. 1

100 240 VAC/ 48 / 60 VDC CH. 2 10 / 100BASE-T

E1 / T1
E1 / T1 LOOPBACK 100M
LINK ACT
B. SUB MAIN SUB MAIN
CONTROL
ON

LR LR

RETURN POWER DCE CH. 1

100 240 VAC/ 48 / 60 VDC CH. 2 10 / 100BASE-T

E1 / T1
E1 / T1 LOOPBACK 100M
LINK ACT
C. SUB MAIN SUB MAIN
CONTROL
ON

LR LR

RETURN POWER DCE CH. 1

100 240 VAC/ 48 / 60 VDC CH. 2 10 / 100BASE-T

E1 / T1
E1 / T1 LOOPBACK 100M
LINK ACT
D. SUB MAIN SUB MAIN
CONTROL
ON

LR LR

RETURN POWER DCE CH. 1

100 240 VAC/ 48 / 60 VDC

E1 / T1
E1 / T1 LOOPBACK

E. SUB MAIN SUB MAIN

CONTROL CH. 2
ON

LRLR

RETURN POWER DCE CH. 1

100 240 VAC/ 48 / 60 VDC

E1 / T1
E1 / T1 LOOPBACK

F. SUB MAIN SUB MAIN

CONTROL CH. 2
ON

LRLR

RETURN POWER DCE CH. 1

Figure 2-2. Typical FCD-E1LC Rear Panels

2-8 FCD-E1LC Enclosures FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Table 2-3. FCD-E1LC Rear Panel Components

Item Function

POWER Connector Power connector, for connection of the supply voltage (either AC or DC)

CH.1 Connector 25-pin D-type female connector, for connection to the channel 1 data port
(interface type depends on ordering option)

CH.2 Connector 25-pin D-type female connector, for connection to the optional channel 2 data
port (interface type depends on ordering option)

CH.2 10/100BASE-T RJ-45 connector for connection to the optional Ethernet LAN port, which has a
Connector 10/100Base-T interface

CH.2 10/100BASE-T Green indicator located in the CH.2 10/100BASE-T connector:

LINK Indicator • Lights steadily when the LAN port detects the link integrity signal (normal
condition when there is no data activity)
• Off when the port does not detect the link integrity signal

CH.2 10/100BASE-T Yellow indicator located in the CH.2 10/100BASE-T connector, flashes or lights
ACT Indicator when the LAN port transmits or receives data (normal operating condition)

CH.2 10/100BASE-T Green indicator for the optional LAN port:

100M Indicator • Lights steadily when the LAN port operates at a data rate of 100 Mbps
• Off when the LAN port operates at a data rate of 10 Mbps

E1/T1 MAIN Connector RJ-45 connector for connection to the main link interface

E1/T1 SUB Connector RJ-45 connector for connection to the optional sublink interface

CONTROL DCE Connector 9-pin female D-type connector for connection to the FCD-E1LC supervisory
terminal port

E1/T1 LOOPBACK Selector 4-section switch, controls the main and sublink analog test loopbacks. For a
description of the loopbacks, refer to Chapter 4.

Section Function
SUB L Controls the sublink analog local loopback.
SUB R Controls the sublink analog remote loopback.
MAIN L Controls the main link analog local loopback.
MAIN R Controls the main link analog remote loopback.

To change the state of a loopback:

• To activate a loopback using this switch, set the corresponding switch
section to ON. The TST indicator on the front panel will light.
• To deactivate a loopback, return the switch to OFF. If no other test is active
on the FCD-E1LC, the TST indicator on the front panel will turn-off.
Note that the same activities can be performed by management (for example,
using the supervisory terminal). The actual state of a loopback is therefore
determined by the last command (either from the management or the switch).

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 FCD-E1LC Enclosures 2-9

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

2.6 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches

Caution Before starting, review the safety and ESD precautions given in Section 2.1.

The FCD-E1LC preliminary configuration is performed by means of a supervisory

terminal. To protect against unauthorized use, you must enter a password before
you can start using the supervisory terminal.
In case you do not know the password and/or the communication parameters of
the serial supervisory port, it is necessary to restore the default values before
you can start configuration activities.
The FCD-E1LC includes an internal switch (marked SW2 on the FCD-E1LC main
printed circuit board) that controls the loading of the default parameters.
This section presents instructions for reaching the internal switch.

Note If you can use the supervisory terminal to enter the INIT DB command, you may
skip this section.

It is also recommended to check the settings of the internal switch in case the
configuration data prepared by you is lost after resetting (or turning off and on
again) the FCD-E1LC: usually, this indicates that the FCD-E1LC switch is set to
reload the factory-default parameters upon power-up.

Note For some FCD-E1LC hardware versions, it is not necessary to open the enclosure
to reach the switch: in these versions, the switch is located under the main
printed circuit board and can be accessed by opening a small cover on the bottom
of the FCD-E1LC case.

To reload the default parameters by means of the internal switch:

1. Open the FCD-E1LC enclosure as explained below.
2. Set the INIT_DB section of switch SW2 to ON.
3. Arrange the FCD-E1LC for safe operation with the cover open.
4. Connect power to the FCD-E1LC.
5. Wait about 2 minutes, and then disconnect the power from the FCD-E1LC.
6. Set the INIT_DB section of switch SW2 to OFF.
7. Close the FCD-E1LC cover as explained on page 2-14.
6H

Opening the Unit

To open the FCD-E1LC enclosure:
1. Refer to Figure 2-3 and open the screws that fasten the FCD-E1LC cover.
7H

Keep screws in a safe place, for reuse.

2-10 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Release
Screws

Figure 2-3. FCD-E1LC Cover Screws

2. Refer to Figure 2-4 and release the cover catches as illustrated in the figure.
8H

If pushing the catches with the nails of your fingers is difficult, you may use a
narrow-blade screwdriver.

Press in this
direction with
your index
finger and...
Cover
Catches

… simultaneously
press upward edge
of bottom cover
with your thumb

Figure 2-4. Releasing FCD-E1LC Cover Catches

3. After catches are released, the cover easily slides off. Figure 2-5 shows a
9H

general view of a typical FCD-E1LC unit after cover is removed.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches 2-11
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

Switch
SW2

Figure 2-5. FCD-E1LC, General View After Cover is Removed

To check and change internal switch SW2:
1. Refer to Figure 2-6 and identify the location of the SW2 switch.
10H

Note In addition to switch SW2 identified in these figures, the FCD-E1LC boards include
additional switches and jumpers that are preset by the manufacturer and must
not be moved.

2-12 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Not Used (Always OFF)

ON
Switch

SW2
SW2

OFF

Figure 2-6. FCD-E1LC, Location of Switch SW2

2. The functions of SW2 switch sections are explained in Table 2-4. Check and if
1H

necessary change the positions of the various sections in accordance with

your requirements.

Table 2-4. Switch SW2 Functions

Section Function

INIT_DB This section selects the source of the configuration database parameters.
FCD-E1LC is delivered with its configuration database loaded with the factory default parameters.
You can select this position again to restart with the default parameters in case the current
values are not known.
ON FCD-E1LC loads the factory-default parameters upon power-up.
OFF FCD-E1LC loads the user-selected parameters from its non-volatile memory on power-up.
Default: OFF

Note: User-selected parameter values are not erased by setting the DB INIT section to ON. Only
after FCD-E1LC is turned off and then powered again, do the default values replace the
user values.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches 2-13
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

Table 2-4. Switch SW2 Functions (Cont.)

Section Function

PSW FCD-E1LC is delivered with a default password, RAD. However, to prevent unauthorized personnel
from using the FCD-E1LC supervision program, you can use a password of your own.
ON FCD-E1LC uses the default password.
OFF FCD-E1LC uses the user-defined password.
Default: OFF
The FCD-E1LC polling address (node number) is also affected by the PSW section: with this
section set at ON, the node number is set to 0. Upon first-time operation, it is recommended to
use the ON position to start the configuration. You can select this position again to restart with
the default password and node address 0 in case the current user password was lost.

Note You can use the DEF SP command to cancel password protection. In this case, no
password is used, irrespective of the position of this switch section.
DEF PAR This section selects the source of the supervisory port parameters.
ON FCD-E1LC loads the factory-default supervisory port parameters (automatic detection of
any standard data rate in the range of 1200 to 115,200 bps, one start bit, 8 data bits, no
parity, one stop bit, terminal mode).
OFF Supervisory port operates according to user-defined parameters.
Default: OFF

Note User-selected parameter values are not erased by setting one or more sections of switch
SW2 to ON: this action merely causes FCD-E1LC to use the default values. However, if
FCD-E1LC is powered off and then on again, the default values replace the user values.

Closing the Unit

To close FCD-E1LC enclosure:
1. Refer to Figure 2-7, and place cover as shown.
12H

Figure 2-7. Closing the FCD-E1LC Cover

2-14 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

2. Push cover in the direction shown in Figure 2-7, until you hear the cover
13H

catches click as they lock the cover in place.

3. Refer to Figure 2-3 and fasten the cover with its screws.
14H

Installing FCD-E1LC in a Rack

FCD-E1LC units are intended for installation on desktops, shelves or in 19-inch
racks. Do not connect power to the enclosure before it is installed in the
designated position.
For rack installation, a rack mount (RM) kit, is available from RAD. Refer to the
RM installation leaflet for detailed instructions.

2.7 Connecting the Cables

Before starting, refer to the site installation plan and identify the cables intended
for connection to this FCD-E1LC unit. For general information regarding
connections, refer to Section 2.2.
15H

Connecting the Main Link

To connect the FCD-E1LC main link to equipment with balanced interface:
• Use a straight (point-to-point) cable terminated in RJ-45 connectors to
connect the FCD-E1LC RJ-45 connector designated E1/T1 MAIN to the
designated equipment connector.

Note One of the contacts in the E1 main port connector is used to sense the
connection of the unbalanced adapter cable (see below). Therefore, do not
connect cables with more than two pairs when you want to use the balanced
interface.

To connect the FCD-E1LC main link to equipment with unbalanced interface:

1. Connect the RJ-45 connector of the CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X adapter cable to the
FCD-E1LC RJ-45 connector designated E1/T1 MAIN.
2. Connect the coaxial cables from the other equipment to the two BNC
connectors at the other end of the adapter cable. Pay attention to correct
connection:
Connect the cable from the user’s equipment transmit output to the
green BNC connector (main link receive input)
Connect the cable from the user’s equipment receive input to the red BNC
connector (main link transmit output).

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Connecting the Cables 2-15

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

Connecting the Sublink

To connect equipment with balanced interface to the FCD-E1LC sublink:
• Use a straight (point-to-point) cable terminated in RJ-45 connectors to
connect the designated equipment connector to the FCD-E1LC RJ-45
connector designated E1/T1 SUB.

Note One of the contacts in the E1 sub port connector is used to sense the connection
of the unbalanced adapter cable (see below). Therefore, do not connect cables
with more than two pairs when you want to use the balanced interface.

To connect equipment with unbalanced interface to the FCD-E1LC sublink:

1. Connect the RJ-45 connector of the CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 adapter cable to the
FCD-E1LC RJ-45 connector designated E1/T1 SUB.
2. Connect the coaxial cables from the other equipment to the two BNC
connectors at the other end of the adapter cable. Pay attention to correct
connection:
Connect the cable from the user’s equipment receive output to the green
BNC connector (sublink transmit input)
Connect the cable from the user’s equipment transmit input to the red
BNC connector (sublink receive output).

Connecting the Data Channels

Each serial data port of the FCD-E1LC is terminated in a 25-pin D-type female
connector. The interface type is RS-530 (also supporting X.21) or V.35, according
to order.
The required cables can be prepared in accordance with the port connector wiring
information given in Appendix A, or ordered separately from RAD. See list of
cables available from RAD in Section 2.4.
16H

When using adapter cables, first connect the adapter cable to the FCD-E1LC data
channel connector, and then connect the user’s data cable to the adapter
connector.

Connecting Ethernet
Identify the cable intended for connection to the 10/100Base-T connector.
Connect the cable to the corresponding module connector.
Use a standard (station) cable wired point-to-point for connection to any type of
Ethernet port (hub or station).

2-16 Connecting the Cables FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Connecting the CONTROL DCE Port

The front panel CONTROL DCE supervisory port has a 9-pin D-type female
connector with RS-232 interface. The interface (DCE or DTE) is
software-selectable:
• When the interface is configured as DCE, enables direct connection to
terminals and management stations
• When the interface is configured as DTE, it is necessary to use a crossed
adapter cable.

2.8 Connecting to Power

Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the
device) or disconnecting the protective earth terminal can make the device
dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.

Before switching this FCD-E1LC unit on and before connecting any other cable,
FCD-E1LC protective earth terminals must be connected to protective ground.
This connection is made through the DC or AC power cable. The AC power cord
Warning plug should only be inserted in an outlet provided with a protective ground
(earth) contact, whereas when using DC power it is necessary to ground the AD
grounding terminal. The protective action must not be negated by use of an
extension cord (power cable) without a protective conductor (grounding).
Dangerous voltages may be present on the cables connected to the FCD-E1LC:
• Never connect cables to an FCD-E1LC unit if it is not properly installed and
grounded. This means that its power cable must provide a protective ground
(earth) contact before connecting any user or main link cable to the FCD-E1LC.
• Disconnect all the cables connected to the connectors of the FCD-E1LC before
disconnecting the FCD-E1LC power cable.

Caution FCD-E1LC does not have a power on/off switch, and therefore it will start
operating as soon as power is applied. It is recommended to use an external
power on/off switch to control the connection of power to the FCD-E1LC. For
example, the circuit breaker used to protect the supply line to the FCD-E1LC may
also serve as the on/off switch.

AC power should be supplied to the FCD-E1LC through the 5-foot (1.5m)

standard power cable terminated in a standard 3-prong plug.
The connection of the FCD-E1LC to a DC power source is made by means of a
cable terminated in the AC/DC adapter (AD) plug.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Connecting to Power 2-17

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

To connect AC power:
1. Connect the AC power cable to the FCD-E1LC power connector.
2. Insert the plug at other end of the AC power cable into a socket (outlet) with
a protective ground contact. If power is connected, the PWR indicator of the
FCD-E1LC will light.
To connect DC power:
• Refer to the DC power supply connection supplement for instructions how to
wire the DC cables. The DC supplement is provided on the technical
documentation CD supplied with the unit.

2-18 Connecting to Power FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Chapter 3
Operation

3.1 Turning On the Unit

To turn on the unit:
1. Before first-time turn-on, check that the installation and the required cable
connections have been correctly performed in accordance with the
instructions given in Chapter 2.
2. Set all the sections on the rear panel E1/T1 LOOPBACK switch to OFF.
3. To enable monitoring the FCD-E1LC during power-up and preliminary
configuration procedures, it is recommended to connect a terminal to the
CONTROL DCE connector of the FCD-E1LC.
Any standard ASCII terminal (dumb terminal or personal computer emulating
an ASCII terminal) equipped with an RS-232 communication interface can be
used to control the FCD-E1LC operation. For best results, use VT-100 terminal
emulation. To monitor the power-up process, configure the terminal for any
rate supported by the FCD-E1LC (1200 to 115200 bps), one start bit, eight
data bits, no parity, and one stop bit. Select the full-duplex mode, echo off,
and disable any type of flow control.

Caution FCD-E1LC does not have a power on/off switch, and therefore it will start
operating as soon as power is applied.

4. Connect power to the FCD-E1LC.

5. The FCD-E1LC PWR indicator turns on; the other indicators turn-on for a start
time, and then turn-off.
6. Wait for the completion of the power-up self-test and initialization. This
takes about one minute.
7. Press <CR> several times in sequence to establish communication with the
FCD-E1LC. The terminal will then display various messages during the
power-up.
A typical display, which notifies you of the results of its power-up self-test is
shown below:
FCD Self Test in Progress ... OK
or
FCD Self Test in Progress ... Failed
In the latter case, you must repair or replace FCD-E1LC before you can
continue using it.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Turning On the Unit 3-1

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

8. If FCD-E1LC successfully passed the power-up self-test, it sends the following

message:
FCD Supervisory Port On Line. Type ‘H’ For Help
Now FCD-E1LC is ready for operation.

Note If the configuration data stored by FCD-E1LC is corrupted, FCD-E1LC reports that
the self-test has failed or sends the DATABASE CHECKSUM ERROR alarm
message.
In this case, you will have to load the default configuration. To do this, either
enter the INIT DB command from the terminal or use the internal switch SW2 as
explained in Chapter 2.

3.2 Indicators

Front Panel Indications

Note
For a description of FCD-E1LC front panel indicator functions, see FCD-E1LC Front
Panel on page 2-6 .

As long as the FCD-E1LC is powered, the PWR indicator lights steadily.

During normal operation, the ALM, all the SYNC LOSS, and the TST indicators must
be off.
Any alarm condition causes the ALM indicator to light (for major alarms, it will
flash). Use the supervision terminal to read the alarm messages.
If any of the main link alarm indicators or the TST indicator lights, data transfer is
interrupted.
The TST indicator lights when a test is activated. If the test is activated from the
local FCD-E1LC, see the test type using the supervision terminal (DSP ST CH1,
DSP ST CH2, DSP ST ML or DSP ST SL). You can disconnect a local loop by
means of the CLR LOOP command, as explained in Appendix D.

Ethernet Interface Status Indications

If the FCD-E1LC optional Ethernet port is not yet connected to an active LAN, the
LINK indicator is off.
After the connection is made and the auto-negotiation process is successfully
completed:
• The LINK indicator lights steadily
• The ACT indicator lights steadily or flashes at the rate of the traffic flow
through the FCD-E1LC LAN interface
• The 100M indicator indicates the actual operating rate: off for 10 Mbps, on
for 100 Mbps.

3-2 Indicators FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

3.3 Configuration and Management Alternatives

•
Before an FCD-E1LC unit can be used in its intended application, it is necessary to
perform two types of activities:
• Preliminary configuration: its purpose is to prepare the FCD-E1LC unit for
using any of the supported management facilities.
• System configuration: its purpose is to specify the system operational
parameters needed by the FCD-E1LC to fulfill its intended function in the
user’s environment.

Preliminary Configuration
The preliminary configuration of the FCD-E1LC unit must always be performed
using an ASCII terminal equipped with an RS-232 communication interface,
directly connected to the FCD-E1LC supervisory port (the CONTROL DCE
connector). The ASCII terminal can be a standard “dumb” communication terminal,
or a personal computer running a terminal emulation or communication program.

System Configuration
FCD-E1LC operating mode is determined by a set of parameters stored in the
internal non-volatile memory. To select these parameters, use the FCD-E1LC
supervision terminal.

Note If you make a configuration error (for example, you select a parameter value that
conflicts with the current operating mode), FCD-E1LC rejects the erroneous
selection and displays an error message that identifies the error.

After the operating parameters have been loaded (a process called

configuration setup), FCD-E1LC no longer requires operator attendance.
The configuration stored in the FCD-E1LC memory is not affected when power is
turned off. Upon turn-on, FCD-E1LC checks the validity of the stored
configuration data, and after the self-test, takes the last selected configuration.
If the configuration does not require modification, FCD-E1LC is ready for
operation immediately after power is applied. However, if the configuration data
is corrupted, FCD-E1LC loads a default configuration prepared by the
manufacturer instead.
After performing the preliminary configuration, you can configure the FCD-E1LC
unit using any of the following options:
• Use the terminal as a supervision terminal, for performing all the
management activities supported by the FCD-E1LC unit.
• Configure the FCD-E1LC unit from any IP host using the Telnet protocol. After
establishing a Telnet session with the FCD-E1LC unit, the Telnet protocol
offers the same functionality as the supervision terminal, and in addition
enables remote access over IP networks.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Configuration and Management Alternatives 3-3

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

Typically, the Telnet host is a PC or a UNIX station with the appropriate suite
of TCP/IP protocols. The host can be directly connected to the managed
FCD-E1LC unit. However, the host may also be located at a remote site, the
only requirement being that IP communication be established between that
site and the managed FCD-E1LC unit (either out-of-band through a separate
network, using the SLIP or PPP protocol, or inband through the main and/or
sublink).
• Configure the FCD-E1LC unit by means of SNMP-based network management
stations.

Routine Management
During regular operation, the FCD-E1LC unit can be managed using any of the
options listed above for system configuration.

Supervisory Terminal Characteristics

Any standard ASCII terminal (“dumb” terminal or personal computer emulating an
ASCII terminal) equipped with a V.24/RS-232 communication interface can be
used to control FCD-E1LC operation.

Control Port Interface Characteristics

FCD-E1LC has a V.24/RS-232 asynchronous DCE port, designated CONTROL DCE
and terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector. The control port continuously
monitors the incoming data stream and will immediately respond to any input
string received through this port. Moreover, when the FCD-E1LC control port is
configured to support the SLIP or PPP protocol, messages in each of the
supported protocols are automatically identified and processed.
The supervisory terminal can be connected to the FCD-E1LC control port either
directly, or through a modem or any other type of full-duplex data link:
• For direct connection to the control port, use a straight-through cable.
• For connection to the control port through a modem or data link, use a cross-
cable (also called null modem cable).
FCD-E1LC can communicate with the supervision terminal or modem at rates of
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps. The word
format consists of one start bit, 8 data bits, and one or two stop bits. Parity can
be odd, even or disabled.
Always make sure the communication interfaces of the terminal/modem and the
FCD-E1LC are configured for operation with the same parameters.

Modems
The CONTROL DCE port also supports the connection of a remote supervision
terminal through a modem or low-speed data link: in this case, configure the
control port interface as DTE and use a cross-cable (also called null modem cable)
to connect to the CONTROL DCE port.

3-4 Configuration and Management Alternatives FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

FCD-E1LC supports two types of modems:

• Dial-up Hayes™ compatible modems. FCD-E1LC has call-in and call-out
capabilities; that is, it can accept external calls and initiate calls in order to
report alarms.
• Multidrop modems, such as the RAD SRM-8 miniature multidrop modem. The
multidrop configuration can be used to connect the supervisory ports of
several FCD-E1LC units located in close proximity to a common supervision
terminal, using multidrop modems (or digital sharing devices): these devices
enable to connect a single terminal to many FCD-E1LC units.
For multidrop operation, each FCD-E1LC unit must be assigned a node
address in the range of 1 through 255.

Note FCD-E1LC units also support address 0: assigning address 0 to an FCD-E1LC unit
means that it will accept and answer any message: this is not permitted in
multidrop operation. Address 0 is however recommended for use both with direct
connections, and point-to-point or dial-up modem links.

Control Port Handshaking Protocol with Supervision Terminals

The handshaking between the FCD-E1LC and the supervision terminal uses the
control lines in the CONTROL DCE supervisory port connector. Since the interface
mode is selected by software, the direction of the interface signals is the same in
both the DCE and DTE mode, and a cross-cable is required for the DTE mode.
The control lines in DCE and DTE modes and the direction of the control signals
are detailed in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1. Control Port Handshaking Protocol

Control Interface Type Function

Line DCE DTE
CTS Out Not Used Clear to Send line. The state of the CTS line is determined by
user’s configuration:
• ON – The CTS line is always ON (active).
• =RTS – The CTS line follows the RTS line.

DCD Out Out Data Carrier Detect line. The state of the DCD line depends on the
communication address (node number):
• When the node address is 0, the DCD line is always ON (active).
• When a non-zero node address is used, the DCD line becomes ON
(active) when data is detected on the RD line, provided the
FCD-E1LC recognizes its own address in the data stream.
To simulate DTE operation, the delay between these events can be set
by the user (by means of the DCD DELAY parameter).

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Configuration and Management Alternatives 3-5

 Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

Control Interface Type Function

Line DCE DTE
DSR Out Out Data Set Ready line. The state of the DSR line is user-configurable.
• Usually, the DSR line is configured to track the DTR line. In this case,
if the control port interface is DTE, the DSR line will be set to ON for
five seconds when the RI line is ON while the DTR line is OFF.
• If the control port interface is DCE, the DSR line can also be
configured to be continuously ON. However, if the DTR line switches
to OFF, the DSR line will also switch to OFF for 5 seconds.
In addition, FCD-E1LC always sets DSR OFF (inactive) for 5
seconds when the EXIT command is executed or the disconnect
time-out expires.
DTR In In Data Terminal Ready line. The terminal sets the DTR line ON
(active) to gain control over FCD-E1LC and start a
configuration/monitoring session. When you end the terminal
control connection, the DTR line will switch to OFF (becomes
inactive).
RI Not Used In Ring Indication line. The RI line is used only with dial-up modems
(INT = DTE).
The RI line is normally OFF (inactive), and switches to the ON
(active) state when the modem, attached to the FCD-E1LC
front-panel CONTROL DCE connector, detects an incoming call.
RTS In In Request to Send line. The RTS line is normally ON (active) when
the supervisory terminal is in session. When the RTS line is OFF
(inactive), FCD-E1LC interprets any data received from the
terminal on the transmit input (TD) line as MARK.

Autobaud Function
When the Autobaud function is enabled, FCD-E1LC identifies the operating data
rate of the supervisory terminal by analyzing the timing of three consecutive
Enter + Line Feed characters (generated by pressing three times the <Enter>
key). The detected data rate is then used for the current communication session.
The automatic baud rate identification procedure is performed (or repeated)
whenever three consecutive <Enter>s are received after one of the following
events occurs:
• The DTR line has been switched off.
• The EXIT command has been executed.
• The idle disconnect timeout expired because no data has been exchanged
with the supervisory terminal.
In case one of these events occurred, FCD-E1LC assumes that the current
communication session has been terminated.

Note You must disable the Autobaud function if you intend to use SLIP or PPP
communication.

3-6 Configuration and Management Alternatives FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Telnet (IP) Host Characteristics

Typically, the Telnet host is a PC with the appropriate suite of TCP/IP protocols, or
a UNIX station.
The Telnet host can be directly connected to the managed FCD-E1LC unit, or be
located at any site from which IP communication can be established to the
managed FCD-E1LC.

Connection of Telnet Hosts

Telnet enables communication with multiple FCD-E1LC units, using either inband
or out-of-band communication.
• For communicating out-of-band using the SLIP or PPP protocol, the Telnet
host can be connected (or be able to communicate) to the control port of the
FCD-E1LC unit.
• For inband communication, the user can enable the transfer of management
traffic through the main and/or sublinks.
The Telnet protocol operates over IP. Since the IP traffic is automatically routed
to the desired unit through the internal IP routers of chained equipment (see
background information in Appendix B and Appendix C), a Telnet host capable of
communicating with one FCD-E1LC unit may provide management access to
several interconnected FCD-E1LC units, as well as to many other types of
equipment that support this type of management (this includes many RAD
network products, for example, Megaplex-2100, DXC multiservice access nodes,
multiplexers, etc.).

Connections for SNMP Management

The SNMP protocol also operates over IP, therefore all the requirements
described above for Telnet management also apply to the connection of SNMP
network management stations.
Multidrop configurations must not be used with SNMP, because multidrop
operation requires that all the units strictly observe the rules of polled
communication. This is not true for SNMP agents, because they can initiate
transmissions on their own (whenever they have a trap to transmit).

3.4 Turning Off the Unit

To turn the FCD-E1LC off:
Disconnect the power from the FCD-E1LC.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Turning Off the Unit 3-7

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-8 Turning Off the Unit FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Chapter 4
Configuration
This chapter provides configuration guidelines for configuring FCD-E1LC.
The configuration activities presented in this chapter require that the FCD-E1LC
be first configured using a standard ASCII terminal, as explained in Chapter 3.
However, after performing the preliminary configuration of the terminal and the
FCD-E1LC in accordance with Chapter 3, the same configuration activities can also
be performed by means of a Telnet host, or an SNMP network management
station.
For general information regarding the supervision language syntax, usage and
commands, see FCD-E1LC Command Language below.
Detailed descriptions of each command appear in Appendix D.

4.1 Configuring for Management

The scope of the preliminary configuration activities is to enable management
communication with the FCD-E1LC system.
See Chapter 2 for detailed information on internal settings, and connection
instructions.

Configuring the Supervision Terminal

The software necessary to run the FCD-E1LC control program is contained in the
FCD-E1LC unit. To initialize FCD-E1LC for correct terminal operation, the control
port parameters should be set as described in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1. Control Port Communication Parameters

Parameter Settings for Terminal Management Session Default

Speed The FCD-E1LC control port can communicate at rates of 1200, AUTO
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps. You
can configure a specific rate, or enable the Autobaud function.
Data Word The word format consists of one start bit, 8 data bits, and one or 1 stop
two stop bits. bit
Parity Parity can be odd, even or none. None
Interface For direct connection, choose DCE. DCE
For connection through a modem or data link, choose DTE.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Configuring for Management 4-1

Chapter 4 Configuration Installation and Operation Manual

Before starting an initial configuration session, you must set the supervision
terminal parameters to match the configuration of the CONTROL DCE port.
To configure the supervision terminal:
1. Select full-duplex mode.
2. Turn the terminal echo off.
3. Disable any type of flow control.
4. Connect the terminal cable to the CONTROL DCE connector of FCD-E1LC.
5. Turn the supervisory terminal on.
6. For the initial configuration session, it is recommended to use the following
communication parameters: 19200 bps (alternatively, since Autobaud is used
as a default, you can also use any standard rate you prefer in the range of
1200 to 115200 bps), one start bit, eight data bits, no parity, one stop bit.
7. Turn terminal echo off, and disable any type of flow control.
8. Whenever feasible, configure the terminal to use VT-100 emulation.
You are now ready to start a supervision terminal configuration session.

Starting a Control Session

If the AUTO (Autobaud) mode is enabled, start the control session by pressing
<Enter> three times.
After the FCD-E1LC has successfully identified the data rate of the supervision
terminal, it displays the results of its power-up self-test:

FCD Self Test in Progress ... OK

or

FCD Self Test in Progress ... Failed

In the latter case, you must service the FCD-E1LC before you can continue using
it. If FCD-E1LC successfully passed the power-up self-test, it sends the following
message:
FCD Supervisory Port On Line. Type ‘H’ For Help

Note
• When the node number of FCD-E1LC is a number other than zero, you must
enter the node number before entering each command. Enter
NODE<SP>‘node number’<SP>, where ‘node number’ is the node number in
the range from 1 to 255, and <SP> is a space. FCD-E1LC echoes the node
number, i.e. Node<SP>‘node number’<SP>.
• When password protection is enabled, FCD-E1LC displays the PASSWORD>
prompt at the beginning of the session. In this case, type the current
password (case-sensitive, four to eight characters). The default password is
1234. If your password is accepted, the FCD> prompt is displayed.

4-2 Configuring for Management FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuration

Preliminary Configuration
Perform the procedure explained below. If you need detailed instructions and
explanations regarding each command, refer to Appendix D.
For detailed instructions regarding the use of the FCD-E1LC command line
interface, refer to Section 4.2.

Load the Factory-Default Parameters

To load the default parameters, enter the INIT DB command.

Select the Supervisory Terminal Control Sequences

Select the terminal control sequences for the terminal type (or emulation) in use
by entering the command DEF TERM 'terminal_type'. 'terminal_type'
stands for one of the following types: VT-52, VT-100, TV-920, FREEDOM100,
FREEDOM220.
If your terminal requires control sequences differing from those used by the
terminals listed above, type the command F and enter your terminal control
sequences.

Configure the CONTROL DCE Port

Configure the CONTROL DCE port of the FCD-E1LC system by entering the
command DEF SP. You will see the supervisory port configuration data form.
A typical form with the default values is shown below:
SPEED STOP_BITS PARITY INTERFACE CTS DCD_DEL DSR
AUTO 1 NONE DCE =RTS 0_MS ON
POP_ALM PWD LOG_OFF CALL_OUT_TRIGGER ACTIVATE_CALL_OUT
AUXILIARY_DEVICE
NO NO NO NONE ANY CASE
TERMINAL

Set the Time and Date for the Internal Clock

Set the time of the internal clock of the FCD-E1LC system by entering the
command TIME, and then set the date by entering the command DATE.

Note The time and date must be set whenever the FCD-E1LC is powered up (either
after a power failure or after being turned off).

At this stage, you can start using the supervision terminal to perform FCD-E1LC
configuration activities.

Activate Password Protection

To prevent unauthorized modification of the FCD-E1LC system parameters, you can
use a password. The use of a password is controlled by the DEF SP command.
After enabling password protection, define the desired password by entering the
command DEF PWD.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Configuring for Management 4-3

Chapter 4 Configuration Installation and Operation Manual

Configuring for Telnet or SNMP Management

Note FCD-E1LC can be managed by Telnet or SNMP via inband management or over the
control port using SLIP or PPP.

To prepare the FCD-E1LC system for configuration by means of Telnet hosts

and/or SNMP management stations, use the supervision terminal to configure the
supervisory port and the SNMP agent as explained below.

Configure the SNMP Agent

• Define the FCD-E1LC system name, using the DEF NAME command.
• Define the FCD-E1LC SNMP agent parameters using the DEF AGENT
command. The IP addresses of the SNMP agent and IP host must be within
the same IP subnet, and the various community names must match those of
the IP host. A typical SNMP agent parameters data form is shown below:

TELNET_APATHY_TIME = 10 MIN

IP_ADDRESS = XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

SNMP READ COMMUNITY = public

SNMP WRITE COMMUNITY = private

SNMP TRAP COMMUNITY = public

where X stands for the digits of the prescribed IP address.

Configure the FCD-E1LC Control Port for Telnet and SNMP

Access
To use the FCD-E1LC control port for Telnet and SNMP access, use the DEF SP
commands, as applicable, and select the following parameters:
• Select the appropriate data rate in the SPEED field. Do not select AUTO.
• Select NMS SLIP or NMS PPP in the AUXILIARY DEVICE field.

Note When using SLIP, if the FCD-E1LC control port is connected to a serial port of
another RAD equipment unit, for example, a Megaplex-2100/2104, make sure to
select SLIP AGENT in the AUXILIARY DEVICE field.

At this stage, you can start using Telnet hosts or SNMP management stations to
perform FCD-E1LC configuration activities.

4-4 Configuring for Management FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuration

Ending the Control Session

Type EXIT to end a supervision terminal session.
Type BYE to end a Telnet session.

4.2 FCD-E1LC Command Language

This section presents the FCD-E1LC command language, its syntax and command
options, and an index of the supported commands.

Command Syntax
This section presents the supervision language syntax.
Enter commands at the FCD> prompt. This prompt appears at the beginning of
each new line. The cursor appears to the right of the prompt.
If a node number is required, enter the node number before the command using
the following syntax:

NODE<SP>‘node number’<SP>‘command’<Enter>.

FCD-E1LC echoes commands as you enter them, character by character.

Use <Space> as a separator between command fields and/or parameters.
To correct typing errors, press <Backspace> until the error is cleared, then enter
the correct characters.
To execute a command, press <Enter>. After when the command is executed,
FCD-E1LC displays the current date and time, and then displays a new command
prompt.
After the last page of the data form, press <Enter> to initiate command
evaluation.
To cancel command execution, press <Ctrl+C>; the FCD> prompt appears, and you
can enter a new command.

Note You can also use <Ctrl+C> to stop the automatic repetition of commands sent
with the /R option.

You can recall and edit previous commands by pressing <Ctrl+A>. FCD-E1LC stores
the last 10 commands in a special buffer, and each <Ctrl+A> pressing retrieves
the previous command from that buffer. The retrieved command appears on the
command line, and can be edited as desired.
Press <Ctrl+D> to execute again the last command.
If an idle disconnect time-out is specified, FCD-E1LC automatically disconnects
the ongoing session if no command is received from the terminal for the
specified time-out interval.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 FCD-E1LC Command Language 4-5

Chapter 4 Configuration Installation and Operation Manual

If you enter an invalid command, FCD-E1LC does not execute it and displays the
following:
• If the command is not valid in the current system configuration, or the values
you are trying to set are incorrect, FCD-E1LC displays an appropriate error
message. For a list of configuration error messages, refer to Configuration
Error Messages in Chapter 4.
• If the command syntax is incorrect, FCD-E1LC displays the following message:
Bad command or parameter. Type ‘h’ for help

In this case you must enter the correct command.

If the terminal screen fills up during the exchange with the FCD-E1LC, it displays
the following message:
HIT SPACE–BAR TO CONTINUE

After pressing the spacebar, the terminal scrolls to the next page.

What to Do If …
If FCD-E1LC does not respond to any command entered at the terminal, this may
be caused by one of the following:
• FCD-E1LC is configured to use a protected password: to correct, select first
the factory-default password.
• CONTROL DCE communication parameters are not identical to those of the
terminal: to correct, select first the factory-default parameters.

Selecting the Factory-Default Password

The FCD-E1LC is delivered with password protection disabled. If the password
protection has been enabled (using the DEF SP command), you must enter a
password when you start a control session. If the password is incorrect, the
FCD-E1LC will not respond. However, even if the current password is not known,
you can establish management communication with the FCD-E1LC by appropriate
setting of the PSW section of SW2, located on the FCD-E1LC main board. Set the
PSW section of SW2 as follows:

OFF In this position, you can define your own password and node address.

ON Set the section to ON to restore the default FCD-E1LC password (1234), and
change the node address to the default value of 0. The change will be made
after you turn the FCD-E1LC off for a short time, and then back on. After
restoring the default values, return the switch section to OFF. If the section is
left at ON, your changes will be discarded (i.e., replaced again by the default
values) the next time the FCD-E1LC is turned on.

4-6 FCD-E1LC Command Language FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuration

Selecting the Factory-Default Supervisory Port

Communication Parameters
If the supervisory port parameters are not correct, the FCD-E1LC will not respond.
This can be corrected by means of the DEF PAR section of the switch SW2. Set
the DEF PAR section of the DIP switch as follows:

OFF In this position, you can define the desired supervisory port parameters.

ON Set the switch section to ON to enforce the default supervisory port

parameters. The default parameters are AUTO (automatically detected data
rate), one start bit, eight data bits, no parity, one stop bit and no flow control.
With the switch section at ON, the default parameters values override the values in
the configuration database.
The database values can only be changed using the DEF SP command. Therefore,
after setting the switch to ON, establish communication with the FCD-E1LC using
the default parameters values and configure the desired values.
When ready to use the new values, return the switch section to OFF, and then
change the communication parameters of the terminal as required.

Ending a Control Session

You can end the control session in one of the following three ways:
• Disconnect the cable from the FCD-E1LC front-panel CONTROL DCE
connector.
• Send the EXIT command from the supervisory terminal (for Telnet sessions,
use BYE).
• FCD-E1LC automatically disconnects the ongoing session if no commands are
received for a certain period of time (controlled by the LOG_OFF parameter).
You can, however, disable this timeout. For Telnet sessions, the disconnect
interval is determined by the Telnet apathy time.
After the session is ended, it is necessary to enter the correct password again to
start a new session (if the password was enabled).

Note A control session may also be terminated by the FCD-E1LC when the terminal DTR
line switches to the inactive (OFF) state.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 FCD-E1LC Command Language 4-7

Chapter 4 Configuration Installation and Operation Manual

Command Options
Table 4-2 lists general types of options, which are available with some
commands. See details in the explicit command set index, Table 4-3.

Table 4-2. Command Options

Option Meaning Example of Usage

/A All CLR ALM /A

Clears all the alarms stored by the alarm buffer

/C Clear DSP BERT /C

Display BERT results and clear the BER counter

/CA Clear all DSP PM /CA

Display the performance monitoring counters,
and then clear (reset to 0) all the counters

/I Start the injection of errors DSP BERT ML /I

/R Repeat automatically command DSP BERT ML /R

execution. Available only when node Enables you to monitor the updated results of
address is 0; not available with Telnet the bit error rate test being run on the FCD-E1LC

/S Stop the injection of errors DSP BERT ML /S

Index of Commands
Table 4-3 lists the FCD-E1LC command set in alphabetical order.
Table 4-3. FCD-E1LC Command Set Index
Command Purpose Options

BYE End the current Telnet session

CLR ALM Clear alarms stored in the FCD-E1LC alarm buffer /A
CLR LP LOC ANA ML Clear the corresponding user-initiated test or loopback.
CLR LP LOC ANA SL
CLR LP LOC DIG ML
CLR LP LOC DIG SL
CLR LP REM ANA ML
CLR LP REM ANA SL
CLR LP REM DIG ML
CLR LP REM DIG SL
CLR LP LOC CH 1
CLR LP LOC CH 2
CLR LP REM CH 1
CLR LP REM CH 2
CLR LP ML
CLR LP SL
CLR LP CH 1
CLR LP CH 2

4-8 FCD-E1LC Command Language FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuration

Command Purpose Options

CLR LOOP LOC ANA ML Clear user-initiated test or loopback.

CLR LOOP LOC ANA SL
CLR LOOP LOC DIG ML
CLR LOOP LOC DIG SL
CLR LOOP REM ANA ML
CLR LOOP REM ANA SL
CLR LOOP REM DIG ML
CLR LOOP REM DIG SL
CLR LOOP LOC CH 1
CLR LOOP LOC CH 2
CLR LOOP REM CH 1
CLR LOOP REM CH 2
CLR LOOP ML
CLR LOOP SL
CLR LOOP CH 1
CLR LOOP CH 2
CLR LOOP BERT ML
CLR LOOP INBAND ML
DATE Set the date for the FCD-E1LC internal clock
DEF AGENT Define the FCD-E1LC SNMP agent configuration parameters
DEF ALM MASK Define the alarms to be masked (ignored)
DEF AR Define the alarm reporting method, and the alarm indications, for
each alarm level
DEF BERT ML Define the type of test sequence to be used for BER testing on the
main link
DEF CALL Define the dial-out parameters
DEF CH Configure the parameters of the data channel
DEF DNLOAD ML Define the main link inband management parameters
DEF DNLOAD SL Define the sublink inband management parameters
DEF MANAGER LIST Define or modify the network management stations to which the
SNMP agent of this FCD-E1LC unit will send traps
DEF ML Configure main link parameters
DEF NAME Define the logical name of the FCD-E1LC
DEF NODE Define the node number of the FCD-E1LC
DEF PROMPT Define the supervisory port prompt
DEF PWD Define a new password
DEF ROUTE Define the network management stations to be statically routed via
the supervisory port
DEF SL Configure sublink parameters
DEF SP Configure supervisory port parameters
DEF SYS Configure system parameters
DEF TERM Reset the terminal control codes to 0

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 FCD-E1LC Command Language 4-9

Chapter 4 Configuration Installation and Operation Manual

Command Purpose Options

DEF TERM VT100 Select the control codes for one of the standard terminal types
DEF TERM TV920
DEF TERM VT52
DEF TERM FREEDOM100
DEF TERM FREEDOM220
DSP AGENT Display the SNMP agent parameters
DSP ALM Display the contents of the alarm buffer and optionally clear the /C
buffer /CA
DSP BERT ML Display the results of the last BER measurement made on the main /I /R
link /S /C
DSP HDR TST Displays hardware test results
DSP MANAGER LIST Display the network management stations to which the SNMP agent
of this FCD-E1LC unit sends traps
DSP PM ML Display the contents of the main link performance monitoring /C
registers, and optionally clear these registers /CA
DSP PM SL Display the contents of the sublink performance monitoring registers, /C
and optionally clear these registers /CA
DSP REM AGENT Display information on the remote SNMP agents handled by the
FCD-E1LC IP router
DSP ST CH1 Display status information on a data channel
DSP ST CH2
DSP ST ML Display status information on the main link /C
DSP ST SL Display status information on the sublink /C
DSP ST SYS Display system status
DSP TS Display information on the use and type of main link timeslots
EXIT End the current control session
F Define control codes for the supervision terminal
HELP Displays a concise index of commands and option switches
INIT DB Load the default configuration instead of the user’s configuration
LOOP LOC ANA ML Activate the corresponding user-controlled test or loopback.
LOOP LOC ANA SL
LOOP LOC DIG ML
LOOP LOC DIG SL
LOOP REM ANA ML
LOOP REM ANA SL
LOOP REM DIG ML
LOOP REM DIG SL
LOOP LOC CH 1
LOOP LOC CH 2
LOOP REM CH 1
LOOP REM CH 2
LOOP BERT ML
LOOP INBAND ML
RESET Reset the FCD-E1LC
TIME Set the time of the FCD-E1LC internal clock

4-10 FCD-E1LC Command Language FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Chapter 5
Configuring FCD-E1LC for
a Typical Application
This chapter provides configuration guidelines for FCD-E1LC systems.
The configuration activities presented in this chapter require that the FCD-E1LC
be first configured using a standard ASCII terminal, as explained in Chapter 3.
However, after performing the preliminary configuration of the terminal and the
FCD-E1LC in accordance with Chapter 4, the same configuration activities can also
be performed by means of a Telnet host, or an SNMP network management
station.
For general information regarding the supervision language syntax, usage and
commands, refer to Chapter 4.
Detailed descriptions of each command appear in Appendix D.

5.1 Typical Configuration Procedures

Outline of General Configuration Procedure

To prepare a typical FCD-E1LC system for operation in accordance with customer’s
requirements, perform the following activities in the order given in Table 5-1.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Typical Configuration Procedures 5-1

Chapter 5 Configuring FCD-E1LC for a Typical Application Installation and Operation Manual

Table 5-1. Outline of Configuration Procedures

Step Activity Reference

Perform the preliminary configuration Chapter 3

Define system configuration DEF SYS

Configure the FCD-E1LC main link DEF ML

Configure each FCD-E1LC port and its connections to DEF SL

the main link DEF CH1
DEF CH2

Define the general system parameters DEF AGENT

DEF MANAGER LIST
DEF ROUTE
DEF NAME
DEF PROMPT
DEF PWD

Define dial-up parameters (when applicable) DEF CALL

Define alarm handling parameters DEF ALM MASK

DEF AP
DEF AR

5.2 Configuration Example

This section illustrates the procedure details for configuring two FCD-E1LC units
using a supervision terminal, for a typical application (see Figure 5-1).
In this application, two FCD-E1LC units, each having one data channel and a sub
link, are interconnected via the E1 network and managed by a RADview network
management station attached to a DXC unit. The data channel rate is 128 kbps,
the number of voice channels to be connected between the two PBXs is 10, and
the management station is connected to both FCD-E1LC units via the main links.

5-2 Configuration Example FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Configuring FCD-E1LC for a Typical Application

128 kbps 128 kbps

V.35 V.35

E1 Network
FCD-E1LC FCD-E1LC

PBX PBX

DXC Router
RADview
Station

Figure 5-1. FCD-E1LC Application for Configuration Examples Interconnected by

an E1 Network

Configuring the Local FCD-E1LC

Configure General System Parameters

1. Type INIT DB to reset the FCD-E1LC database to the default parameters.
2. Type DEF TERM VT-100 to configure the control port to operate with the
terminal control codes of the VT-100 terminal.
3. Type DEF SP to configure the control port.
A typical display, as seen after the required parameters have been selected,
is shown below:
SPEED STOP_BITS PARITY INTERFACE CTS DCD_DEL
DSR
AUTO 8 NO DCE =RTS 0 MS
ON
POP_ALM PWD LOG_OFF CALL_OUT_TRIGER ACTIVATE_CALL_OUT
AUXILIARY_DEVICE
NO NO NO NONE ANY CASE
TERMINAL

4. Type DEF MANAGERS LIST to configure the FCD-E1LC to accept one

RADview management station:
The RADview station IP address is 192.114.029.201
The total number of managed units is 16, therefore the subnet mask is
255.255.255.240.
A typical data form, as seen after the rows used to define the first
management station have been filled in, is shown below:

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Configuration Example 5-3

Chapter 5 Configuring FCD-E1LC for a Typical Application Installation and Operation Manual

MANAGER 1 IP ADDRESS 192.114.029.201

MANAGER 1 SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.240

5. Type DEF AGENT to configure the SNMP agent parameters:

The FCD-E1LC management IP address is 192.114.029.209
Write community used by the RADview station: RAD
The other parameters can be left at their factory defaults.
A typical display, as seen after the required parameters have been selected,
is shown below:

OLD AGENT PARAMETERS

IP_ADDRESS IS : = 0.0.0.0

READ COMMUNITY IS : = public

WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = private

TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public

TELNET_APATHY_TIME
10 MIN

IP_ADDRESS IS : = 192.114.029.209

READ COMMUNITY IS : = public

WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = RAD

TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public

6. Type DEF DNLOAD ML to configure the FCD-E1LC inband management

parameters for the main link:
Management mode: Frame Relay
Network management traffic carried in timeslot 30.
A typical display, as seen after the required parameters have been selected,
is shown below:
DNLOAD MODE
FRAME_RL
TS_NUM SPEED
30 64

Configure Main Link Parameters

Type DEF ML to define the required main link parameters:
E1 link interface operating mode: LONG
Framing mode: G.732N

5-4 Configuration Example FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Configuring FCD-E1LC for a Typical Application

Enable the CRC-4 function (YES)

Set the idle timeslot code to 7F
Enable transparent reporting of sub link alarms through the main link (RAI
= ENABLE).
After configuration, you should see the following display:

FRAME CRC-4 SYNC RX_GAIN IDLE_TS_CODE RAI

G732N YES CCITT LONG 3F ENABLE

Configure Sub Link Parameters

Type DEF SL to define the required sub link parameters:
E1 link interface operating mode: SHORT
Framing mode: G.732S
Enable the CRC-4 function (YES)
Set the idle timeslot code to 7F
Enable transparent reporting of sub link alarms through the main link (RAI
= ENABLE)
Use the out-of-service code 3F
Transfer 10 subscriber timeslots and the signaling timeslot (timeslot 16)
through the main link.
After configuration, you should see the following display:
FRAME CRC-4 SYNC RX_GAIN IDLE_TS_CODE RAI
G732N NO CCITT SHORT 7F ENABLE
CGA OOS_SIG OOS_CODE
NONE N/A 3F
MAP_MODE START_TS TS_TYPE NUM_OF_TS
USER N/A N/A N/A
TS : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TYPE : DATA DATA NO NO NO NO VOICE VOICE
TS : 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TYPE : VOICE VOICE VOICE VOICE VOIC VOICE VOICE DATA
TS : 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TYPE : VOICE NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
TS : 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
TYPE : NO NO NO NO NO DEDIC NO

Configure Data Channel Parameters

Type DEF CH 1 to define the data channel characteristics and connect it to the
main link timeslots 1 and 2.
After configuration, you should see the following display:

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Configuration Example 5-5

Chapter 5 Configuring FCD-E1LC for a Typical Application Installation and Operation Manual

MULTIPLIER SPEED FIFO_SIZE CLOCK MODE CTS CLOCK_POLARITY

64 128 AUTO DCE ON NORMAL
MAP_MODE START_TS TS_TYPE
SEQ 1 DATA
TS : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TYPE : DATA DATA NO NO NO NO NO NO
TS : 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TYPE : NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
TS : 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TYPE : NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
TS : 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
TYPE : NO NO NO NO NO DEDIC NO

Check Main Link Timeslot Assignment

Type DSP TS to check main link timeslot assignment.
The resulting display is shown:
TS : 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
TYPE : DATA DATA NC NC NC NC VOICE VOICE VOICE VOICE
DEST : CH1 CH1 NA NA NA NA SUB SUB SUB SUB

TS : 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
TYPE : VOICE VOICE VOICE VOICE VOICE DATA VOICE NC NC NC
DEST : SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB NA NA NA

TS : 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
TYPE : NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
DEST : NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA DEDIC NA

Configure System Timing

Type DEF SYS to configure the FCD-E1LC nodal timing:
Lock FCD-E1LC timing to the recovered main link clock
Use the internal oscillator as fallback source.
After configuration, you should see the following display:
CLK_MASTER CLK_FBACK DATE_FORMAT
ML NONE DD-MM-YYYY

Configuring the Remote FCD-E1LC

Repeat the procedure for the other FCD-E1LC.

5-6 Configuration Example FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting and
Diagnostics
This chapter describes the FCD-E1LC diagnostic functions. The diagnostic
functions available on the FCD-E1LC include:
• Alarm and event collection – see Section 6.3
• Collection of performance monitoring data – see Section 6.1.
• Test and loopbacks for checking transmission paths – see Section 6.4.
These functions can be used to identify problems in the network incorporating
FCD-E1LC units, test the proper operation of each FCD-E1LC unit, and rapidly
locate the cause of the fault: within the FCD-E1LC itself, in its connections to the
network or to a user’s equipment unit, or in the another network component.
In addition to the information listed above, you can find in Section 6.4
troubleshooting instructions, including a list of the configuration (“sanity”) error
messages generated by the FCD-E1LC. This Section will help you solve problems
that prevent normal operation of the equipment.
If you need additional support for this product, see Section 6.6 for technical
support information.

6.1 Monitoring Performance

The FCD-E1LC enables collecting transmission performance data for its main and
sublinks. The collected data enables the system administrator to monitor the
transmission performance, and thus the quality of service provided to users, for
statistical purposes.
In addition, when problems are reported by users served by FCD-E1LC, the
collected data can be used for diagnostic purposes, because it can help identify
the source of the problem.
This section describes the FCD-E1LC performance evaluation and monitoring
functions. the available performance monitoring parameters depend on the
configuration of the main and sublink:
• When the CRC-4 option is enabled, it is possible to monitor end-to-end the
data transmission performance. The error detection information is derived
from the data payload, by performing a cyclic redundancy check (CRC). The
resulting CRC checksum is transmitted in addition to the raw data bits. The
receiving end recalculates the checksum and compares the results with the

Monitoring Performance 6-1

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics FCD-E1LC Installation and Operation Manual

received checksum: any difference between the two checksums indicates that
one or more bit errors are contained in the current data block being
evaluated.
• When the CRC-4 option is disabled, most of parameters available with the
CRC-4 option enabled are available as well, but the line transmission
impairments are detected in a different way (based on bipolar coding
violations).
The main link performance data can be displayed by means of the DSP PM ML
command, and the sublink data – by means of the DSP PM SL command, as
explained in Appendix D. The performance monitoring parameters are listed in
Table 6-1.
By adding the /CA switch to the command, you can reset all the performance
diagnostics registers.
Table 6-1. Performance Monitoring Parameters

Display Name Description

CURRENT ES Current errored CRC-4 enabled: An errored second is any second containing
seconds one or more of the following events: CRC error events, OOF
events, AIS events, controlled slip events.
CRC-4 disabled: An errored second is any second containing
one or more BPV events, or one or more OOF events, or one
or more AIS events, or one or more controlled slip events.
In both cases, the data is collected for the current
15-minute interval.
CURRENT UAS Current An unavailable second is any second in which a failed signal
unavailable state exists. A failed signal state is declared when
seconds 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) occur, and is
cleared after 10 consecutive seconds of data are processed
without a SES.
CURRENT SES Current severely CRC-4 enabled: A SES is a second with 832 or more CRC
errored seconds error events, or one or more OOF events.
CRC-4 disabled: A SES is a second with 2048 or more BPV
events.
In both cases, the data is collected for the current
15-minute interval.
CURRENT BES Current bursty CRC-4 enabled: A BES is a second with 2 to 319 CRC error
errored seconds events and no AIS events. The data is collected for the
current 15-minute interval.
CRC-4 disabled: not relevant.
CURRENT LOFC Current loss of The loss of frame (LOF) counter counts the loss of frame
frame counter alignment events. The data is collected for the current
15-minute interval.
CURRENT LES Current line A line errored second is a second in which one or more Line
errored seconds Code Violation events were detected. The data is collected
for the current 15-minute interval.

6-2 Monitoring Performance

FCD-E1LC Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Display Name Description

CURRENT SEFS Current severely A severely errored framing second is a second with 320 or
errored framing more OOF events or one or more AIS event. The data is
seconds collected for the current 15-minute interval.
CURRENT DM Current degraded The total number of degraded minutes in the current
minutes 15-minute interval. A degraded minute is a minute in which
the BPV events rate ranges between 1×10 and 1×10 . This
-3 -6

number is updated every minute.

CURRENT CSS Current slip A CSS is a second with one or more controlled slip events.
second counter The data is collected for the current 15-minute interval.
CURRENT TIMER Current interval Seconds elapsed from the start of interval counting.
timer
24 HOUR ES Long-term errored The total number of ES in the current 24-hour interval.
seconds
24 HOUR UAS Long-term fail The total number of UAS in the current 24-hour interval.
seconds
24 HOUR SES Long-term The total number of SES in the current 24-hour interval.
severely errored
seconds
24 HOUR BES Long-term bursty The total number of BES in the current 24-hour interval.
errored seconds
24 HOUR LES Long-term line The total number of LES in the current 24-hour interval.
errored seconds
24 HOUR SEFS Long-term The total number of SEFS in the current 24-hour interval.
severely errored
framing seconds
24 HOUR LOFC Long-term loss of The total number of LOF events in the current 24-hour
frame counter interval.
24 HOUR LES Long-term line The total number of LES in the current 24-hour interval.
errored seconds
24 HOUR SEFS Long-term The total number of SEFS in the current 24-hour interval.
severely errored
framing seconds
24 HOUR LOFC Long-term loss of The total number of LOF events in the current 24-hour
frame counter interval.
24 HOUR CSS Long-term slip The total number of CSS in the current 24-hour interval.
second counter
24 DEGRADE MIN Long-term The total number of degraded minutes in the last 24-hour
degraded minutes interval. This number is updated every minute.
LAST 24 DEGRADE MIN Last degraded The total number of degraded minutes in the previous
minutes 24-hour interval. This number is updated every 24 hours.
24 INTERVAL Long-term interval The number of valid 15-minute intervals in the previous
counter 24-hour period.

Monitoring Performance 6-3

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics FCD-E1LC Installation and Operation Manual

Display Name Description

BPV LAST MINUTE Last-minute BPV The number of BPV events detected in the last minute.
counter
BPV WORST MINUTE Worst-minute BPV The number of BPV events detected during the worst minute
counter since the last time the counters were cleared.

6.2 Detecting Errors

Power-Up Self-Test
Upon power-up, FCD-E1LC automatically performs self-test, to test critical circuit
functions. At the start of the self-test procedure, the front panel indicators are
turned on and then off: during this interval, check that all the indicators are OK.
• If a problem is detected during self-test, FCD-E1LC automatically sends
reports to the supervision terminal.
• If the self-test is successfully completed, FCD-E1LC starts normal operation,
and its front-panel indicators display the status, as explained in Chapter 2.

6.3 Handling Alarms

After starting normal operation, the FCD-E1LC continuously monitors critical
signals and signal processing functions. In case a problem is detected, the
FCD-E1LC generates time-stamped alarm messages that cover all the events. An
internal real-time clock provides the time stamp.

Note The internal clock does not have battery backup, and therefore must be set to
the correct time after turn-off or power failure. This action can be performed by
the management station, or by means of the supervision terminal.

For continuous system monitoring, the user can enable automatic transmission of
alarm messages through the supervisory port. Alarm messages are also
automatically sent as traps to the user-specified network management stations.
Internally, the FCD-E1LC stores alarms in an alarm buffer. This alarm buffer can
store up to 100 alarm messages, together with their time stamps. The alarm
history buffer is organized as a FIFO queue; therefore after 100 alarms are
written into the buffer, new alarms overwrite the oldest alarms.
The alarms can be read on-line by the network administrator using the network
management station, a Telnet host, or a supervision terminal. The network
administrator can then use the various diagnostic tests to determine the causes of
the alarm messages and to return the system to normal operation.

6-4 Handling Alarms

FCD-E1LC Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Alarm Display
FCD-E1LC displays alarm messages on the supervision terminal. There are two
types of alarms, designated as ON/OFF and ON:
• An ON/OFF alarm is a state alarm: it is displayed only when the alarm
condition is present, and is automatically removed when the condition is
cleared (if the alarm is being displayed, it will disappear only when the display
is refreshed by scrolling).
• An ON alarm is an event alarm: it records the occurrence of event and
therefore it persists even after the event that caused the alarm condition is
cleared.
When an ON/OFF-type alarm changes its state from ON to OFF, it is not removed
from the alarm buffer. The state change is indicated by a new message, which
added to the alarm buffer.
To display the alarm history:
• Type DSP ALM.
The terminal displays the alarms stored in the buffer (up to 100), listing for each
alarm its number, the alarm message, its state (ON or OFF), and the time and
date when the last change in its state occurred. A typical display looks like this:

ALARM 21 SIGNAL LOSS ON 01:42:11 2001-01-01

ALARM 25 LOCAL SYNC LOSS ON 01:45:14 2001-01-01

To clear the alarm buffer:

• Type CLR ALM /CA.

Alarm Messages
Table 6-2 presents the alarm messages displayed on the FCD-E1LC control
terminal in ascending order of their numbers, and lists the actions required to
correct the alarm condition.

Handling Alarms 6-5

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

Table 6-2. FCD-E1LC Alarm Messages

Alarm
Terminal Message Description Corrective Actions Severity Type
Number

04 ALARM BUFFER More than 100 alarms entries have Read the messages, and then send the CLR ALM /A (CA) MINOR ON
OVERFLOW been written in the alarm buffer since command from the supervision terminal
the last clear command

06 DB-INIT SWITCH IS The INIT_DB section of switch SW2 is 1. Remove FCD-E1LC cover. MINOR ON
ON set to ON (the changes made to the 2. Set the section to OFF.
database will be lost if the unit is
turned off or reset)

07 CLOCK WAS CHANGED The FCD-E1LC switched to the fallback Check the master clock source. A clock source is replaced MINOR ON
TO FALLBACK clock source, because the master clock as a result of failure under the following conditions:
source failed 1. ML or SL – fails during local loss of frame
synchronization on the main link
2. CH1 or CH2 – fails when the data channel equipment is
disconnected or inoperative (DTR line not asserted)

08 CLOCK WAS CHANGED The FCD-E1LC switched to the internal 1. Check the two clock sources. MINOR ON
TO INTERNAL clock source, because both the master 2. Perform the power-up self-test and replace the
and the fallback clock sources failed FCD-E1LC if a failure is detected

09 CLOCK WAS CHANGED The FCD-E1LC switched back to the Normal state – no action required MINOR ON
TO MASTER clock source selected as the master
source

10 DIAL-OUT CYCLE The current cycle of call attempts Check the modem connected to the CONTROL DCE MAJOR ON
FAILED failed connector. If the called numbers are often busy, you may
also increase the number of call retries

6-6 Handling Alarms FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Table 6-2. FCD-E1LC Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Alarm
Terminal Message Description Corrective Actions Severity Type
Number

11 DATABASE CHECKSUM FCD-E1LC technical failure (the 1. Use the supervision terminal to enter the INIT DB MAJOR ON/OFF
ERROR database currently stored in the command.
non-volatile memory of FCD-E1LC is 2. Turn the FCD-E1LC off for a few minutes, and then
corrupted) turn it back on and read the alarm messages
generated during the power-up self-test. Replace the
FCD-E1LC if a failure is detected

12 PSWRD SWITCH IS ON PWD section of switch SW2 is set to If it is no longer necessary to enforce the default password MINOR ON
ON and node number, return the switch section to OFF

13 SP-PAR SWITCH IS Section DEF PAR of switch SW2 is set If this setting is no longer required, return the switch MINOR ON
ON to ON section to OFF.

15 DIAL-OUT PRIMARY The call attempts to the primary If the number is not busy, check the modem connected to MAJOR ON
CALL FAILED dial-out number failed the CONTROL DCE connector. If the called number is often
busy, you may also increase the number of call retries

16 DIAL-OUT ALTERNATE The call attempts to the alternate If the number is not busy, check the modem connected to MAJOR ON
CALL FAILED dial-out number failed the CONTROL DCE connector. If the called number is often
busy, you may also increase the number of call retries

17 SELF TEST ERROR A problem has been detected during Replace the FCD-E1LC. MAJOR ON/OFF
FCD-E1LC self-test

21 SIGNAL LOSS Loss of main link port receive signal 1. Check cable connections to the link connector. MAJOR ON/OFF
2. Check line and/or other communication equipment
providing the link to the remote unit.
3. Perform the power-up self-test and replace the
FCD-E1LC if a failure is detected.

22 EXCESSIVE BPV The rate of bipolar violations in the 1. Problem in the network facilities used by the main link. MAJOR ON/OFF
main link receive signal exceeds 2. Turn the FCD-E1LC off for a few minutes, and then
1 × 10 during a measurement interval
-6

turn it back on and read the alarm messages generated

of 1000 seconds during the power-up self-test. Replace the FCD-E1LC if
a failure is detected

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Handling Alarms 6-7

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

Table 6-2. FCD-E1LC Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Alarm
Terminal Message Description Corrective Actions Severity Type
Number

23 AIS OCCURRED AIS is being detected on the link Problem at the equipment connected to the remote end of MAJOR ON/OFF
the link

24 AIS SYNC LOSS Local loss of frame synchronization Problem at the equipment connected to the remote end of MAJOR ON/OFF
alarm on the main link, caused by AIS the link
condition

25 LOCAL SYNC LOSS Local loss of frame synchronization 1. Check cable connections to the link connector. MAJOR ON/OFF
alarm on the main link 2. Check line and/or other communication equipment
providing the link to the remote FCD-E1LC
3. Replace the FCD-E1LC

26 LOCAL MF ALARM Local loss of multiframe 1. Check that the correct framing mode is used at the MAJOR ON/OFF
synchronization alarm on the main link local and remote ends.
2. Perform the corrective actions listed for LOCAL SYNC
LOSS.

27 REMOTE MF ALARM Remote loss of multiframe Problem at the remote equipment. MAJOR ON/OFF
synchronization alarm on the main link

28 REMOTE SYNC LOSS Remote loss of frame synchronization Problem at the remote equipment. Perform the following MAJOR ON/OFF
alarm on the main link checks on the remote equipment:
1. Check cable connections to the link connector.
2. Check line and/or other communication equipment
providing the link to the remote equipment.
3. Replace the equipment.

29 FRAME SLIP Frame slips are detected on the main 1. Incorrect selection of master clock source MAJOR ON
link. Updated once per second. 2. Problem at far end (unstable clock source)
Note:This alarm message is not 3. Replace the FCD-E1LC only if steps 1 and 2 do not
displayed during local loss of frame correct the problem.
synchronization

6-8 Handling Alarms FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Table 6-2. FCD-E1LC Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Alarm
Terminal Message Description Corrective Actions Severity Type
Number

30 BPV ERROR Bipolar violations in the main link Have the main link checked. Perform the power-up self-test MINOR ON
receive signal. Updated once per and replace the FCD-E1LC if a failure is detected
second

31 EXCESSIVE ERR The bit error rate of the link receive 1. Problem in the network facilities used by the main link. MAJOR ON/OFF
RATIO signal exceeds 1 × 10 -3

2. Turn the FCD-E1LC off for a few minutes, and then

turn it back on and read the alarm messages generated
during the power-up self-test. Replace the FCD-E1LC if
a failure is detected

32 CRC-4 ERROR CRC-4 errors detected in the main link 1. Have the link checked. MINOR ON
receive signal. Updated once per 2. Perform the power-up self-test and replace the
second FCD-E1LC if a failure is detected

34 SFIFO SLIP Technical problem (FIFO 1. Check the clock mode of the corresponding data channel. MAJOR ON
overflow/underflow), usually caused by 2. Turn the FCD-E1LC off for a few minutes, and then
differences in clock rates turn it back on and read the alarm messages generated
during the power-up self-test. Replace the FCD-E1LC if
a failure is detected.

35 LOOP INBAND ON An inband activated loopback is now If the loopback is no longer needed, disconnect it MAJOR ON
connected on the data channel

36 MANAGEMENT PORT IS The management port receives its own Find the location of the loopback and request MAJOR ON/OFF
LOOPED messages (this could be caused by a disconnection
test loopback on the communication
path used for SNMP management or on
the management port). Management is
not possible while this condition is
present

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Handling Alarms 6-9

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

Table 6-2. FCD-E1LC Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Alarm
Terminal Message Description Corrective Actions Severity Type
Number

37 MANAGEMENT PORT IS The FCD-E1LC cannot communicate 1. Correct the parameters. MAJOR ON/OFF
DOWN with the network management 2. Check for disconnection.
station. This may indicate incorrect
3. Check for hardware failure.
setup of the management port
parameters, a problem on the 4. Check the management communication path
communication path, or a hardware
failure

38 DUPLICATE NAME IN Another node in the network uses the Check and change as required MAJOR ON/OFF
THE NETWORK FCD-E1LC logical name. This prevents
SNMP management

42 LINK INTEGRITY The Ethernet interface is not Check the cable connecting the LAN, the LAN media, and MAJOR ON/OFF
ERROR connected to an operating LAN check that at least one station is active on the LAN

43 RTS/CONTROL IS OFF Indicates that the RTS signal on the Set the RTS signal on the DTE unit to ON state. MAJOR ON/OFF
DTE unit is off.

60 CRC MF ALARM Local loss of synchronization to the 1. Check cable connections to the port connector. MINOR ON
CRC-4 multiframe on the main link 2. Check line and/or other communication equipment
(only on E1 port operating with CRC-4 providing the link to the remote unit.
enabled)
3. Replace the FCD-E1LC unit.

6-10 Handling Alarms FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 6.4 Troubleshooting

Preliminary Checks
If the problem is detected the first time the FCD-E1LC is put into operation,
perform the following preliminary checks before proceeding:
• Check for proper installation and correct cable connections, in accordance
with the system installation plan.
• Check the configuration parameters in accordance with the specific
application requirements, as provided by the system administrator. In
particular, check for configuration error messages (see the Configuration
Error Messages section below).
• If the FCD-E1LC nodal clock is to be locked to the clock recovered from one of
the user ports, make sure a suitable fallback clock source is configured and
provides a good clock signal.

Configuration Error Messages

If FCD-E1LC detects a configuration mismatch, it displays an appropriate
configuration error message on the supervision terminal.
The configuration error messages have the format ERROR, followed by a numeric
code and a short error message after the error code. Table 6-3 lists the
configuration error messages in ascending order of their codes and explains each
of them.

Table 6-3. FCD-E1LC Configuration Error Messages

Error Code Terminal Message and Description

ERROR 000 MASTER AND FALLBACK CLOCK ARE THE SAME

You are trying to select the same source as both master and fallback clock source. Check
and change as required.

ERROR 001 INVALID MASTER CLOCK SOURCE

The channel you are trying to select as the master clock source is either not connected,
or its clock mode is not DTE2.
Check and change as required.

ERROR 002 INVALID FALLBACK CLOCK SOURCE

The channel you are trying to select as the fallback clock source is either not connected,
or its clock mode is not DTE2
Check and change as required.

ERROR 003 ILLEGAL DCD DELAY AND INTERFACE COMBINATION

You are trying to select a non-zero DCD DELAY after the FCD-E1LC supervisory port
interface has been set as DCE.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Troubleshooting 6-11

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

Error Code Terminal Message and Description

ERROR 004 CONFLICT IN INTERFACE AND DSR PARAMETERS

You selected DSR=ON after the supervisory port interface has been set to DTE. The
DSR=ON selection is valid only for DCE interface.

ERROR 005 TIMESLOT 16 OF E1-G732S FRAME IS MAPPED

You are trying to select the G732S framing mode while timeslot 16 is assigned to one of
the data channels or dedicated to inband management. Free timeslot 16 before
selecting the G732S framing.

ERROR 006 CONFLICT BEETWEEN FRAME AND TIME SLOT TYPES

The port uses G732N framing, but the specified timeslot is configured as a voice
timeslot. Change the type to data.

ERROR 007 CHANNEL SPEED NOT MATCH OPEN NUMBER OF TS

The number of timeslots currently allocated to the data channel is not equal to the
number of timeslots required to support the nominal data rate configured. Either
increase the number of timeslots, or reduce the channel data rate.

ERROR 008 FCD IN LOOP CAN’T UPDATE HARDWARE

When a test or loopback is active, it is not possible to change the FCD-E1LC operating
mode in accordance with the updated configuration parameters. You may see this
message either after pressing ENTER, or after a update data base command has been
received through the supervisory port (or inband management). You must first
deactivate the test or loopback.

ERROR 009 CONFLICT BETWEEN CLOCK MODE AND FIFO SIZE

You are trying to select the DCE or DTE1 clock mode when the FIFO size is not AUTO. A
specific FIFO size can be selected only for the DTE2 mode. Select AUTO.

ERROR 010 TIME-SLOT OUT OF RANGE

When using the SEQ or ALT mapping mode, the sum of the number of timeslots
requested for the data channel and the number of starting timeslot exceeds 31. Check
and change as required.

ERROR 011 ILLEGAL TIMESLOT ALLOCATION

The specified timeslot is allocated to more than one user. Check and correct timeslot
allocation.

ERROR 012 ILLEGAL UNFRAMED CONFIGURATION

You cannot configure the unframed mode when there are main link timeslots connected
to ports.

ERROR 013 ILLEGAL SPEED FOR AUXILIARY DEVICE

The AUTO (Autobaud) mode cannot be selected when the supervisory port is to support
the SLIP protocol (AUX DEV parameter is set to SLIP-NMS).

ERROR 014 WRONG IP ADDRESS

The syntax of the IP address is incorrect. The IP address must be entered in the
dotted-quad format (four numbers in the range of 0 through 255, separated by
periods), as explained in Appendix B.

6-12 Troubleshooting FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Error Code Terminal Message and Description

ERROR 015 WRONG SUB NET ADDRESS

Wrong IP address subnet mask syntax (the same syntax as common IP).

ERROR 016 TWO OR MORE MANAGERS WITH SAME IP ADDRESS

Check that each network management station has a different IP address.

ERROR 017 DEDICATE TIME-SLOT IS MAPPED

The timeslot you are trying to select for use as the dedicated inband management
timeslot on the main link is already assigned. Check and change as required.

ERROR 018 ILLEGAL DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION

You are trying to enable downloading while using the UNFRAME mode. When using the
UNFRAME mode, you must disable downloading.

WARNING 019 CONFLICT BETWEEN SYSTEM CLK AND CHANNEL CLK

A data channel is configured to use the clock mode DTE2, but the master clock source is
not configured to use that channel. Check and change as required.

ERROR 020 DEDICATE TIME-SLOT IS NOT MAPPED

The protocol selected for inband management requires the use of dedicated timeslot,
but no timeslot has been assigned to management on the main link.

ERROR 021 FIFO SIZE TOO SMALL

When selecting the FIFO size manually, you can select only a size which exceeds the
default FIFO size for the corresponding rate. Increase the FIFO size.

ERROR 022 PORT TYPE AND DTE2 CONFLICT

RS-232 and X.21 interfaces do not support the DTE2 clocking mode.

ERROR 023 CHANNEL SPEED EXCEEDS INTERFACE LIMIT

A channel with RS-232 interface needs a maximum of 2 timeslots, because its data rate
can not exceed 128 kbps.

ERROR 051 ILLEGAL PORT LOOP COMBINATION

You are trying to activate an illegal loopback combination (see Allowed Loopback
Combinations on page 6-24). First deactivate the loopback that is currently active.
ERROR 052 LOOP IS NOT ACTIVE
You are trying to deactivate a loopback or test that is not active. Check and change as
required.

ERROR 053 CURRENT LOOP ALREADY BEING PERFORMED

You are trying to activate a loopback that is already active. Check and change as
required.

ERROR 054 ILLEGAL PARAMETER FOR CURRENT CONFIGURATION

You are trying to configure a parameter which is not supported by this FCD-E1LC version.

ERROR 055 LOOP NOT SUPPORTED ON CURRENT FCD TYPE

You are trying to activate a loop that is not supported by the FCD-E1LC.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Troubleshooting 6-13

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

Error Code Terminal Message and Description

ERROR 056 ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT PORT MODE

You are trying to activate a command that cannot be activated due to current port
mode. Check and change as required.

ERROR 057 REPETITIVE MODE CAN'T BE PERFORMED THROUGH TELNET

You are trying to use a command with /R option while using Telnet for management.
This is not allowed.

ERROR 058 CANT PERFORM LOOP - CHANNEL NOT CONNECTED

You are trying to activate a loopback on the data channel while it is not connected.

ERROR 059 ILLEGAL FIELD VALUE

The value entered in the specified field is not allowed. Check and correct as required.

WARNING 060 NEW ROUTE ADDRESS WILL BE ACTIVE ONLY AFTER RESET
After changing the agent route address, you should reset the unit in order for the
system to store the change.

ERROR 061 NEW DOWNLOAD MODE WILL BE ACTIVE ONLY AFTER RESET
To bring into effect the change of the downloading parameter, you have to restart
FCD-E1LC.

ERROR 062 ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT PORT

The parameter you are trying to configure is not supported by this port (e.g., you can
not configure BERT parameters for the E1 sublink).

Troubleshooting Procedure
If the preliminary checks do not correct the problem, check the displayed alarm
messages and perform the corrective actions described in Table 6-2.
If the problem cannot be corrected by performing the actions listed in Table 6-2,
use Table 6-4: identify the trouble symptoms and then perform the actions listed
under Corrective Measures in the order given in the table, until the problem is
corrected.

Table 6-4. Troubleshooting Chart

Trouble Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Measures

FCD-E1LC is “dead” 1. No power Check that both ends of the power cable are
connected properly.

2. Defective FCD-E1LC Replace the FCD-E1LC.

Local FCD-E1LC reports 1. External problem Activate the local analog loopback on the main link.
local main link sync loss Check that the local FCD-E1LC MAIN LOC SYNC LOSS
indicator turns OFF. If the indicator is OFF, the
problem is external.

6-14 Troubleshooting FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Trouble Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Measures

2. Defective FCD-E1LC Turn the FCD-E1LC off for a few minutes, and then
turn it back on and read the alarm messages
generated during the power-up self-test. Replace
the FCD-E1LC if a failure is detected.

Local FCD-E1LC reports 1. External problem Activate the remote analog loopback on the sublink.
local sublink sync loss Check that the local FCD-E1LC SUB LOC SYNC LOSS
indicator turns OFF. If the indicator is OFF, the
problem is external.

2. Defective FCD-E1LC Turn the FCD-E1LC off for a few minutes, and then
turn it back on and read the alarm messages
generated during the power-up self-test. Replace
the FCD-E1LC if a failure is detected.

Local user connected to 1. External problem Activate the local loopback on the data channel.
the FCD-E1LC data channel Check that the equipment connected to the
cannot communicate with channel receives its own signal. If not, the problem
the remote equipment is external.
(main link operates
2. Defective FCD-E1LC Turn the FCD-E1LC off for a few minutes, and then
normally)
turn it back on and read the alarm messages
generated during the power-up self-test. Replace
the FCD-E1LC if a failure is detected.

LINK indicator of Ethernet 1. No active station on Check that at least one station is active on the LAN
port is not lit the LAN

2. Cable problem Check and replace if necessary the cable that

connects the FCD-E1LC 10/100BASE-T connector
to the LAN

3. Problem on the LAN Check LAN media

4. Defective FCD-E1LC Turn the FCD-E1LC off for a few minutes, and then
turn it back on and read the alarm messages
generated during the power-up self-test. Replace
the FCD-E1LC if a failure is detected

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Troubleshooting 6-15

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6.5 Testing the Unit

The diagnostic loopbacks and tests are used to identify rapidly and efficiently the
location of a problem that prevents normal service.
A diagnostic loopback is activated by entering the appropriate LOOP (or LP)
command, and is deactivated using the CLR LOOP (or CLR LP) command. This
section provides a general description of each loopback and test.
Before executing a test, pay attention to the following:
• If a loopback is already connected, the TST indicator lights.
• If you try to connect a loopback while another loopback of the same type is
already connected, FCD-E1LC displays an error message.
• Not all of the loopback combinations are allowed.
For the list of allowed loopback combinations, refer to Allowed Loopback
Combinations on page 6-24.
• No loopbacks are available for the Ethernet interface. In addition, main link
loopbacks should not be activated on an FCD-E1LC with Ethernet interface
while the Ethernet interface is connected to the LAN. This would cause a
state of permanent collision on the LAN, which would prevent other users
from using the LAN as long as the loopback is connected.

Overview of Test and Loopbacks

The FCD-E1LC supports the following types of test and loopback functions:
• Main link:
Main link local analog loopback (LP LOC ANA ML)
Main link remote analog loopback (LP REM ANA ML)
Main link local digital loopback (LP LOC DIG ML)
Main link remote digital loopback (LP REM DIG ML)
Inband-activated loopback (LP INBAND ML) on the main link
BER testing (LP BERT ML)
• Sublink:
Sublink local analog loopback (LP LOC ANA SL)
Sublink remote analog loopback (LP REM ANA SL)
Sublink local digital loopback (LP LOC DIG SL)
Sublink remote digital loopback (LP REM DIG SL)
• Data channel:
Data channel local loopback (LP LOC CH)
Data channel remote loopback (LP REM CH).

6-16 Testing the Unit FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

The test and loopback functions are described in the following sections. The test
functions are identified by the command used to activate the corresponding
test/loopback function. For clarity, the figures used to illustrate the signal paths
while a loopback or test is activated show only two user ports: one data channel
and the (optional) sublink.

Main Link Tests and Loopbacks

Main Link Local Analog Loopback (LP LOC ANA ML)

This loopback is performed by connecting the main link transmit signal to the
input of the receive path within the LIU section of the main link interface, as
shown in Figure 6-1.

Local FCD-E1LC
User's
Equipment
"1"
Data
Channel

User's Main
Processor Link
Equipment

Sub
Link

Figure 6-1. Main Link Local Analog Loopback

The test signal is provided by the equipment connected to the local user ports:
each one must receive its own transmission.

Note Before activating this loopback on an FCD-E1LC with Ethernet interface,

disconnect the LAN cable from the rear panel Ethernet interface.

During the loopback, the local FCD-E1LC sends an unframed “all-ones” signal to
the remote FCD-E1LC.
This test fully checks the local FCD-E1LC operation and the connections to the
local user’s equipment.

Main Link Remote Analog Loopback (LP REM ANA ML)

The main link remote analog loopback is a locally performed analog loopback
towards the remote equipment. The loopback connects, at the local FCD-E1LC,
the regenerated receive signal to the transmit input of the main link interface
within the LIU section of the main link interface, as shown in Figure 6-2.
The test signal is provided by the user's equipment connected to the ports of the
remote FCD-E1LC: each one must receive its own transmission.
This test checks the connections to the remote user’s equipment, all the circuits
of the remote FCD-E1LC, the main link interface functions of the remote and local
FCD-E1LC, and the transmission plant connecting the two FCD-E1LC.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Testing the Unit 6-17

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

User's Local FCD-E1LC Remote FCD-E1LC User's

Equipment Equipment

Data Data
Channel Channel

User's Transmission Main User's

Processor Main Processor Equipment
Equipment Plant Link
Link
Sub Sub
Link Link

Figure 6-2. Main Link Remote Analog Loopback

Main Link Local Digital Loopback (LP LOC DIG ML)

This main link local digital loopback is performed by connecting the E1 digital
transmit signal of the main link to the input of the receive path, without passing
through the main link line interface (LIU). Signal paths are shown in Figure 6-3.

Note Before activating this loopback on an FCD-E1LC with Ethernet interface,

disconnect the LAN cable from the rear panel Ethernet interface.

The test signal is provided by the equipment connected to the local user ports:
each one must receive its own transmission.
During the loopback, the local FCD-E1LC sends an unframed “all-ones” signal to
the remote FCD-E1LC.
This test checks the digital circuits of the local FCD-E1LC (processor section), and
the connections to the local user’s equipment.

Local FCD-E1LC
User's
Equipment "1"

Data
Channel
Main
User's Processor Link
Equipment

Sub
Link

Figure 6-3. Main Link Local Digital Loopback

Main Link Remote Digital Loopback (LP REM DIG ML)

The main link remote digital loopback is a locally performed digital loopback
towards the remote equipment. The loopback connects, at the local FCD-E1LC,
the regenerated receive signal to the transmit input of the main link interface
within the framer section of the main link interface, as shown in Figure 6-4.
The test signal is provided by the user's equipment connected to the user ports
of the remote FCD-E1LC: each one must receive its own transmission.

6-18 Testing the Unit FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

This test checks the connections to the remote user’s equipment, all the circuits
of the remote FCD-E1LC, the main link interface functions of the remote and local
FCD-E1LC, and the transmission plant connecting the two FCD-E1LC.

User's Local FCD-E1LC Remote FCD-E1LC User's

Equipment Equipment
Data Data
Channel Channel
User's Main Transmission Main User's
Processor Processor
Equipment Link Plant Link Equipment

Sub Sub
Link Link

Figure 6-4. Main Link Remote Digital Loopback

Inband-Activated Loopback (LP INBAND ML)

FCD-E1LC supports the inband-activated loopback function, which includes:
• Transmission of special loopback activation/deactivation codes to the remote
equipment, in user-specified timeslots of the main link interface
• Detection of inband-loopback activation/deactivation codes. The detection of
the activation code in certain main link timeslots results in the activation of
the loopback in the corresponding timeslots, and the deactivation code
cancels the loopback.

Note To enable the activation of a loopback in response to the reception of the inband
loopback activation code from a remote unit, use the DEF BERT ML command to
set the RX_INBAND parameter to ENABLE, and then configure the same test
timeslots and activation/deactivation patterns on both units.

Figure 6-5 shows the signal paths related to the inband-activated loopback, when
the loopback is activated on the local FCD-E1LC in response to a command
received from the remote equipment (another FCD-E1LC or other equipment
supporting the inband-activated loopback).

User's Local FCD-E1LC Remote Unit (e. g. FCD-E1LC) User's

Equipment Equipment
P/O Main Link
Data Interface Data
Channel Channel
Main Link Sequence
Transmission Evaluator
User's User's
Processor Plant Processor
Equipment Equipment
Sequence
Generator
Sub Link Sub
Link

Figure 6-5. Inband-Activated Loopback

The loopback activated in this way is similar to the main link remote digital
loopback, except that it is performed on the local FCD-E1LC, in response to a
command entered at the remote FCD-E1LC, and only in selected timeslots .
The FCD-E1LC allows the user to specify the desired timeslots in which the
activation/deactivation sequences are sent, or instruct the FCD-E1LC to activate
the loopback in the timeslots assigned to the desired user port (data channel 1

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Testing the Unit 6-19

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

or 2, or the sublink). If you already specified timeslots for BER testing (by means
of the DEF BERT ML command), the FCD-E1LC will automatically use the timeslots
specified for BER testing, if such definition is present
The loopback is activated and deactivated by transmitting special sequences for
approximately 2 seconds:
• The FCD-E1LC sending the sequence reports this state as TX INBAND
• The FCD-E1LC receiving the sequence reports this state as RX INBAND.
You can use the standard FT1/FE1 RDL inband sequence specified in ANSI
(T1.403), or select a pattern of your own.
• With the INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN is set to RDL, when the LP INBAND ML
command is activated, the generator sends the standard RDL sequence.
• With the INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN is set to USER, you can specify a desired
string, consisting of 1 to 8 bits. The generator then repetitively sends this
string.
After the loopback is activated in response to the detection of the appropriate
sequence, the local FCD-E1LC starts returning the activation sequence toward the
activating unit, where it is detected by the sequence evaluator. This confirms the
activation of the requested loopback.
To deactivate the loopback (in response to a CLR LP INBAND ML command), the
generator sends the corresponding loop deactivation sequence (either RDL or the
user-configured string). The deactivation is confirmed when the reception of the
deactivation sequence stops.

BER Testing (LP BERT ML)

The BER test subsystem comprises a test sequence generator and a test
sequence evaluator (the same circuits used by the inband-activated loopback
function, which were described above). During the test, the main link payload
data is replaced by a pseudo-random sequence generated by the test sequence
generator. The transmitted data is returned to the test sequence evaluator by a
loopback activated somewhere along the main link signal path.
The evaluator synchronizes to the incoming sequence, and then compares the
received data, bit by bit, to the original data sequence and detects any difference
(bit error). The test results are presented on the supervision terminal (see the
DSP BERT ML command in Appendix D).
To calibrate the system, the user can inject errors at a selectable rate.
When two FCD-E1LC units are operated in a link, it is also possible to perform the
test by activating the BER test subsystems at both ends of the link at the same
time and configuring both subsystems to use the same test parameters. In this
case, it is not necessary to activate a loopback, because the BER test subsystem
can process the sequence transmitted by the far end subsystem in the same way
as its own sequence. This avoids the need to activate a loopback when the
loopback itself may alter the operating conditions on the tested path (for
example, in certain cases a loopback may cause switching to an alternate clock
source and thus affect the flow of timing information within the network).
The BER test is used for two purposes:

6-20 Testing the Unit FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

• As part of the tests that check the operation of the local FCD-E1LC. For this
purpose, activate one of the local main link loopbacks, or connect a physical
loopback that returns the main link transmit data through the receive path at
a desired location along the signal path.
• Check the quality of transmission over the whole link (end-to-end): in this
case, you may use the inband-activated loopback to create the loopback and
then activate the BER test. Alternately, you can activate the BER test at both
ends of the link, as explained above, or, if the remote equipment does not
support the BER test function, you can also use standard BER test equipment.
The type of test sequence and the timeslots in which the test is performed can
be selected by the user (see the DEF BERT ML command in Appendix D).
During the test, the local user’s equipment is disconnected.

Sublink Loopbacks

Sublink Local Analog Loopback (LP LOC ANA SL)

The sublink local analog loopback is performed by connecting the sublink transmit
signal to the input of the sub receive path within the LIU section of the sublink
interface, as shown in Figure 6-6.
The test signal is provided by the equipment connected to the local sublink, that
must receive its own transmission. This test fully checks the connections to the
equipment connected to the local sublink, and the analog (LIU) section of the
sublink interface.

User's Local FCD-E1LC

Equipment

Data
Channel

User's
Processor
Main
Equipment Link

Sub Link

Figure 6-6. Sublink Local Analog Loopback

Sublink Remote Analog Loopback (LP REM ANA SL)

The sublink remote analog loopback is performed by connecting the sublink
transmit signal to the input of the sub receive path within the LIU section of the
sublink interface, as shown in Figure 6-7. The test signal is provided by the
equipment connected to the remote sublink, which must receive its own
transmission.
During the loopback, the local FCD-E1LC sends an unframed “all-ones” signal to
the equipment connected to the local sublink port.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Testing the Unit 6-21

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

This test checks the connections to the equipment connected to the remote sublink
port, all the circuits of the remote FCD-E1LC, the functions of the remote and local
FCD-E1LC, and the transmission plant interconnecting the two FCD-E1LC.

User's Local FCD-E1LC Remote FCD-E1LC User's

Equipment Equipment
Data Data
Channel Channel
Main Transmission Main
User's Processor Processor User's
Link Plant Link
Equipment Sub Link Equipment

Sub
Link

"1"

Figure 6-7. Sublink Remote Analog Loopback

Sublink Local Digital Loopback (LP LOC DIG SL)

The sublink local digital loopback is performed by connecting the sublink transmit
signal to the input of the sub receive path within the LIU section of the sublink
interface, as shown in Figure 6-8.
The test signal is provided by the equipment connected to the local sublink,
which must receive its own transmission. This test fully checks the connections to
the equipment connected to the local sublink, including the operation of the
sublink interface.

User's Local FCD-E1LC

Equipment

Data
Channel

User's
Processor
Main
Equipment Link

Sub Link

Figure 6-8. Sublink Local Digital Loopback

Sublink Remote Digital Loopback (LP REM DIG SL)

The sublink remote digital loopback is performed by connecting the sublink
transmit signal to the input of the sub receive path within the framer section of
the sublink interface, as shown in Figure 6-9. The test signal is provided by the
equipment connected to the remote sublink, which must receive its own
transmission.
This test checks the same functions as the sublink remote analog loopback, except
that it does not check the operation of the analog sublink interface.

6-22 Testing the Unit FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

User's Local FCD-E1LC Remote FCD-E1LC User's

Equipment Equipment
Data Data
Channel Channel
Main Transmission Main
User's Processor Processor User's
Link Plant Link
Equipment Sub Link Equipment

Sub
Link

Figure 6-9. Sublink Remote Digital Loopback

Data Channel Loopbacks

Data Channel Local Loopback (LP LOC CH 1, LP LOC CH 2)

The data channel local digital loopback is performed towards the user’s
equipment connected to the selected local data channel (channel 1 or channel 2).
The loopback is performed by connecting the data channel transmit signal to the
input of the receive path as shown in Figure 6-10.
The test signal is provided by the local user’s equipment, which must receive its
own transmission. This test checks the connections to the local user’s equipment
and the data channel interface.

Note When an alarm condition is present on the main link, the receive data is held at
MARK. Under these conditions, it is not possible to perform BER measurements
when a local channel loopback is connected. If you try to measure BER, the result
is invariably errors.

Local FCD-E1LC
User's
Equipment

Data
Channel

User's Main
Processor
Equipment Link

Sub
Link

Figure 6-10. Data Channel Local Loopback

Data Channel Remote Loopback (LP REM CH 1, LP REM CH 2)

The data channel remote loopback is performed towards the user’s equipment
connected to the selected data channel of the remote FCD-E1LC. The loopback is
performed by connecting the local data channel receive signal to the data channel
transmit input without passing through the local data channel interface, as
shown in Figure 6-11. The test signal is provided by the remote user’s equipment,
which must receive its own transmission.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Testing the Unit 6-23

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

This test checks end-to-end the data link, including the cables connecting the
remote user’s equipment to the FCD-E1LC, the remote FCD-E1LC, the
transmission plant connecting the two FCD-E1LC, and the local FCD-E1LC (except
for the data channel interface).

User's Local FCD-E1LC Remote FCD-E1LC User's

Equipment Equipment

Data Data
Channel Channel

User's Main Transmission Main User's

Processor Processor
Equipment Link Plant Link Equipment

Sub Link Sub

Link

Figure 6-11. Data Channel Remote Loopback

Allowed Loopback Combinations

Not all of the loopback combinations are allowed, because some loopbacks
disconnect the signal paths of other loopbacks. If you try to activate an illegal
loop combination, FCD-E1LC sends a configuration error (ERROR 051: ILLEGAL
PORT LOOP COMBINATION).
For example:
• It is not possible to activate simultaneously remote (including
inband-activated) and local analog loopbacks on the main link because that
would disconnect the signal source for the local loopback.
• It is not possible to activate any remote data channel or sublink loopback
when any main link loopback (analog or digital, local, remote or
inband-activated) is activated
• It is not possible to simultaneously activate local and remote loopbacks on
the same data channel.
The following types of loopbacks can however be simultaneously activated:
• Main link: remote analog loopback and local digital loopback, and
inband-loopback activation together with BER testing
• Sublink: remote digital loopback and local analog loopback
• You can simultaneously activate loopbacks of any type on different data
channels, or a data channel and the sublink.
To help you decide when you are not sure whether you can activate an additional
loopback while one is already activated, you can find in the following tables
(Table 6-5 to Table 6-12) systematic lists of allowed (Yes) and not allowed (No)
loopbacks for each combination of ports. Active indicates the already activated
loopback.

Note It is not possible to activate loopbacks on the Ethernet port. You can only
activate inband loopbacks and test the BER in the main link timeslots assigned to
the Ethernet port, to check transmission quality for the Ethernet payload.

6-24 Testing the Unit FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Table 6-5. Main Link Loopback Combinations

Active Main Link Loopback

Additional Main Link
Loopback Local Local Remote Remote
BERT TX Inband RX Inband
Analog Digital Analog Digital

Local Analog No No No No Yes No No

Local Digital No No Yes No Yes No No
Remote Analog No Yes No No No No No
Remote Digital No No No No No No No
BERT Yes Yes No No No Yes No
TX Inband No No No No Yes No No
Code Transmission
RX Inband No No No No No No No
Code Detection

Table 6-6. Sublink Loopback Combinations

Active Sublink Loopback

Additional Sublink
Loopback Local Local Remote Remote
Analog Digital Analog Digital

Local Analog No No No Yes

Local Digital No No No No
Remote Analog No No No No
Remote Digital Yes No No No

Table 6-7. Main Link and Sublink Loopback Combinations

Active Main Link Loopback

Additional Sublink
Loopback Local Local Remote Remote
BERT TX Inband RX Inband
Analog Digital Analog Digital

Local Analog Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Local Digital Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Remote Analog No No No No No No No
Remote Digital No No No No No No No

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Testing the Unit 6-25

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

Table 6-8. Sublink and Main Link Loopback Combinations

Active Sublink Loopback

Additional Main Link
Loopback Local Local Remote Remote
Analog Digital Analog Digital

Local Analog Yes Yes No No

Local Digital Yes Yes No No

Remote Analog Yes Yes No No

Remote Digital Yes Yes No No

BERT Yes Yes No No

TX Inband Yes Yes No No

Code Transmission

RX Inband Yes Yes No No

Code Detection

Table 6-9. Data Channel Loopback Combinations

Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2

Data Channel 1 Active Loopback Data Channel 1 Active Loopback
Additional Loopback Additional Loopback
Local Remote Local Remote

Local No No Local Yes Yes

Remote No No Remote Yes Yes

Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2

Data Channel 2 Active Loopback Data Channel 2 Active Loopback
Additional Loopback Additional Loopback
Local Remote Local Remote

Local Yes Yes Local No No

Remote Yes Yes Remote No No

Table 6-10. Main Link and Data Channel Loopback Combinations

Active Main Link Loopback

Data Channel 1 and/or 2
Additional Loopback Local Local Remote Remote
BERT TX Inband RX Inband
Analog Digital Analog Digital

Local Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Remote No No No No No No No

6-26 Testing the Unit FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Table 6-11. Data Channel and Main Link Loopback Combinations

Data Channel 1 and/or 2 Active

Additional Main Link Loopback
Loopback
Local Remote

Local Analog Yes No

Local Digital Yes No

Remote Analog Yes No

Remote Digital Yes No

BERT Yes No

TX Inband Yes No
Code Transmission

RX Inband Yes No
Code Detection

Table 6-12. Data Channel and Sublink Loopback Combinations

Data Channel 1 and/or 2 Active

Additional Sublink Loopback
Loopback
Local Remote

Local Analog Yes Yes

Local Digital Yes Yes

Remote Analog Yes Yes

Remote Digital Yes Yes

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Testing the Unit 6-27

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6.6 Frequently Asked Questions

Question: How do I configure Unframed mode in FCD-E1LC?
Answer: For transmission of unframed data, select UNFRM for the main link.
For a single-channel FCD-E1LC, the data rate of channel 1 is automatically set to
2048 kbps.
For a two-channel FCD-E1LC, the data rate of channel 2 is automatically set to
2048 kbps.

FCD>def ml

FRAME CRC-4 SYNC RX_GAIN IDLE_TS_CODE RAI

UNFRM NO CCITT SHORT 3F DISABLE
Question: Does FCD-E1LC support both balanced and unbalanced options for the
uplink?
Answer: Yes, the FCD-E1LC supports both balanced and unbalanced options.
Note that you should use an adapter cable when working in unbalanced mode
(Cable name: CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X).
Question: Can FCD-E1’s IR-ETH interface work opposite FCD-E1LC’s IR-ETH/V
interface?
Answer: Yes.
The ETQN for 10/100BaseT Ethernet bridge with VLAN support of the FCD-E1LC
can work opposite ETUQ for UTP (10BaseT) Ethernet bridge with VLAN support of
the FCD-E1.

6.7 Technical Support

Technical support for this product can be obtained from the local distributor from
whom it was purchased.
For further information, please contact the RAD distributor nearest you or one of
RAD's offices worldwide. This information can be found at www.rad.com (offices
– About RAD > Worldwide Offices; distributors – Where to Buy > End Users).

6-28 Technical Support FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Appendix A
Connection Data

A.1 Main Link Connection Data

Connector Data
The main link port is terminated in an eight-pin RJ-45 connector, designated
E1/T1 MAIN. Table A-1 lists the pin assignment of the connector, and Figure A-1
identifies the connector pins.

Table A-1. Main Link Connector, Pin Assignment

Pin Function

1 Receive data input (ring)

2 Receive data input (tip)

3 Not connected

4 Transmit data output (ring)

5 Transmit data output (tip)

6 Not connected

7 Sense pin for detecting the connection of the unbalanced interface adapter cable

8 Ground

Figure A-1. Main Link RJ-45 Connector, Pin Identification

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Main Link Connection Data A-1

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

Connection Cable for Balanced Interface

The cable used for connecting the FCD-E1LC main link to equipment with
balanced E1 interface should include only two twisted pairs, one for the transmit
path and the other for the receive path.
The cable end intended for connection to the FCD-E1LC must be terminated in an
RJ-45 plug. Make sure pin 7 in the RJ-45 plug is not connected: the main link port
will switch to the unbalanced interface if DC current can flow from pin 7 of the
FCD-E1LC E1/T1 MAIN connector to ground.

Connection Cable for Unbalanced Interface, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X

To connect the FCD-E1LC main link to equipment with unbalanced E1 interface, it
is necessary to convert the FCD-E1LC RJ-45 connector to the standard pair of BNC
female connectors used for unbalanced E1 interfaces.
For this purpose, RAD offers a 15-cm long adapter cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X,
which has one RJ-45 plug for connection to FCD-E1LC E1/T1 MAIN connector and
two BNC female connectors at the other end. Cable wiring is given in Figure A-2.
Connecting this cable to the FCD-E1LC E1/T1 MAIN connector will cause the
interface to switch to the unbalanced mode.
Receive
(Green)

BNC
Female
RJ-45 Transmit
(Red)

RX Ring 1

RX Tip 2 .. Receive
. (Green BNC)
NC 3

TX Ring 4

TX Tip 5 . Transmit
..
(Red BNC)
NC 6

Cable Sense 7

GND 8

Figure A-2. Main Link Unbalanced Interface Adapter Cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X, Wiring Diagram

A-2 Main Link Connection Data FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

A.2 Sublink Connection Data

Connector Data
The sublink port is terminated in an eight-pin RJ-45 connector, designated E1/T1
SUB. Table A-2 lists the pin assignment of the connector. See Figure A-1 for
identification of connector pins.

Table A-2. Sublink Connector, Pin Assignment

Pin Function

1 Transmit data input (ring)

2 Transmit data input (tip)

3 Not connected

4 Receive data output (ring)

5 Receive data output (tip)

6 Not connected

7 Sense pin for detecting the connection of the unbalanced interface adapter cable

8 Ground

Connection Cable for Balanced Interface

The cable used for connecting equipment with balanced E1 interface to the
FCD-E1LC sublink should include only two twisted pairs, one for the transmit path
and the other for the receive path. The cable can usually be wired point-to-point,
because the pins assigned to the receive and transmit pairs in the sublink
connector have been interchanged relative to the main link connector.
The cable end intended for connection to the FCD-E1LC must be terminated in an
RJ-45 plug. Make sure pin 7 in the RJ-45 plug is not connected: the sublink port
will switch to the unbalanced interface if DC current can flow from pin 7 of the
FCD-E1LC E1/T1 SUB connector to ground.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Sublink Connection Data A-3

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

Connection Cable for Unbalanced Interface, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1

To connect equipment with unbalanced E1 interface to the FCD-E1LC sublink,
RAD offers a 15-cm long adapter cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, which has one RJ-45
plug for connection to FCD-E1LC E1/T1 SUB connector and two BNC female
connectors at the other end. Cable wiring is given in Figure A-3.

Note This cable has different wiring (crossed receive and transmit pins), relative to the
cable intended for use on the FCD-E1LC main link (see Figure A-2).

Connecting this cable to the FCD-E1LC E1/T1 SUB connector will cause the
interface to switch to the unbalanced mode.
Receive
(Green)

BNC
Female
RJ-45 Transmit
(Red)

TX Ring 1

TX Tip 2 .. Transmit
. (Red BNC)
NC 3

RX Ring 4

RX Tip 5 . Receive
..
(Green BNC)
NC 6

Cable Sense 7

GND 8

Figure A-3. Sublink Unbalanced Interface Adapter Cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, Wiring Diagram

A.3 Data Channel Connection Data

Connector Data
Each synchronous data channel of the FCD-E1LC is terminated in a 25-pin D-type
female connector, irrespective of the channel interface type. The connector pin
assignment is given in Table A-3. Figure A-4 identifies the pins of the data
channel connector.
Pin 13 Pin 1

Pin 25 Pin 14

Figure A-4. Data Channel Connector, Pin Identification

A-4 Data Channel Connection Data FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

Table A-3. Data Channel Connector, Pin Assignment

Pin Direction Designation Function RS-530 Circuit

1 ↔ FG Frame Ground AA
2 Input SDA Send Data (wire A) BA(A)
3 Output RDA Receive Data (wire A) BB(A)
4 Input RTSA RTS (wire A) CA(A)
5 Output CTSA CTS (wire A) CB(A)
6 Output DSRA DSR (wire A) CC(A)
7 ↔ SG Signal Ground AB
8 Output DCDA DCD (wire A) CF(A)
9 Output RCB Receive Clock (wire B) DD(B)
10 Output DCDB DCD (wire B) CF(B)
11 Input SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) DA(B)
12 Output SCB Send Clock (wire B) DB(B)
13 Output CTSB CTS (wire B) CB(B)
14 Input SDB Send Data (wire B) BA(B)
15 Output SCA Send Clock (wire A) DB(A)
16 Output RDB Receive Data (wire B) BB(B)
17 Output RCA Receive Clock (wire A) DD(A)
18 Input LLBA Local Loopback Activation (wire A) –
19 Input RTSB RTS (wire B) CA(B)
20 Input DTRA/RCEA DTRA/External Receive Clock (wire A) CD(A)
21 Input RLBA Remote Loopback Activation (wire A) –
22 Output DSRB DSR (wire B) CC(B)
23 Input DTRB/RCEB DTRB/External Receive Clock (wire B) CD(B)
24 Input SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) DA(A)
25 Output TMA Test Mode Indication (wire A) –

Connection Data for Data Channel with RS-530 Interface

The functions of the pins in the RS-530 data channel interface connector are
listed in Table A-3. The following sections provide information on the cables
required to connect user’s equipment to a data channel with RS-530 interface in
the various timing modes.

DCE Mode
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with DTE interface. The user’s
equipment can be directly connected to the FCD-E1LC channel connector using a
standard “straight” RS-530 cable (i.e., a cable wired point-to-point). The
“straight” cable is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1LC
side.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Data Channel Connection Data A-5

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

DTE1 Mode
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with DCE interface that can
accept, as its external clock, the receive clock signal provided by the FCD-E1LC
data channel.
In this case, it is necessary to connect a 25-pin male/25-pin male cross-cable (see
Figure A-5) wired in accordance with Table A-4, between the FCD-E1LC CHANNEL
connector and the user’s equipment RS-530 connector.

Figure A-5. RS-530 Adapter Cable for DTE1 Mode

Table A-4. Wiring of RS-530 Adapter Cable for DTE1 Mode

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 3

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 2

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 8

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 20

7 SG Signal Ground 7

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 4

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) 11

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 19

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 9

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 16

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 14

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) 24

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 10

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 23

A-6 Data Channel Connection Data FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 17

25 – Not connected –

DTE2 Mode
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with DCE interface that
provides the transmit and receive clocks to the FCD-E1LC data channel.
In this case, it is necessary to connect a 25-pin male/25-pin male cross-cable (see
Figure A-5) wired in accordance with Table A-5, between the FCD-E1LC CHANNEL
connector and the user’s equipment RS-530 connector.

Table A-5. Wiring of RS-530 Adapter Cable for DTE2 Mode

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 3

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 2

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 8

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 20

7 SG Signal Ground 7

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 4

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) –

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 19

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 9

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 16

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 14

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) –

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 10

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) 15

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 23

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Data Channel Connection Data A-7

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) 12

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 17

25 – Not connected –

Connection Data for Data Channel with V.35 Interface

The following sections provide information on the cables required to connect
user’s equipment to a data channel with V.35 interface in the various timing
modes.

DCE Mode
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.35 DTE interface. The
V.35 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1LC
CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-6)
is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1LC side, and a
34-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated
CBL-HS2V1, is available from RAD.
Cable wiring is given in Table A-6.

Figure A-6. V.35 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

Table A-6. Wiring of V.35 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground A

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) P

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) R

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) C

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) D

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) E

7 SG Signal Ground B

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) F

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) X

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) –

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) W

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) AA

A-8 Data Channel Connection Data FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) S

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) Y

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) T

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) V

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) –

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) –

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) U

25 – Not connected –

DTE1 Mode
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.35 DCE interface that
can accept, as its external clock, the receive clock signal provided by the
FCD-E1LC data channel.
The V.35 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1LC
CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-6)
is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1LC side, and a
34-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated
CBL-HS2V2, is available from RAD.
Cable wiring is given in Table A-7.
Table A-7. Wiring of V.35 Adapter Cable for DTE1 Mode

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground A

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) R

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) P

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) F

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) H

7 SG Signal Ground B

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) C

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) W

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) –

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Data Channel Connection Data A-9

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) X

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) T

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) S

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) U

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) –

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) –

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) V

25 – Not connected –

DTE2 Mode
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.35 DCE interface that
provides the transmit and receive clocks to the FCD-E1LC data channel.
The V.35 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1LC
CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-6)
is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1LC side, and a
34-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated
CBL-HS2V3, is available from RAD.
Cable wiring is given in Table A-8.
Table A-8. Wiring of V.35 Adapter Cable for DTE2 Mode

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground A

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) R

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) P

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) F

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) H

7 SG Signal Ground B

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) C

A-10 Data Channel Connection Data FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) –

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) –

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) X

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) T

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) S

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) –

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) –

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) Y

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) –

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) AA

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) V

25 – Not connected –

X.21 Data Channel

For the X.21 port, only a cable for use in the DCE mode designated CBL-HS2X1 is
available from RAD.
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with X.21 DTE interface. The
X.21 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1LC
CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-7)
is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1LC side, and a
15-pin female connector at the user’s side.
Cable wiring is given in Table A-9.

Figure A-7. X.21 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Data Channel Connection Data A-11

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

Table A-9. Wiring of X.21 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 2

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 4

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 3

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) –

7 SG Signal Ground 8

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 5

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) –

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 12

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) –

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) 13

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 9

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) 6

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 11

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) –

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 10

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) –

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) –

25 – Not connected –

Connection Data for Data Channel with V.36/RS-449 Interface

The following sections provide information on the cables required to connect
user’s equipment to a data channel with V.36/RS-449 interface in the various
timing modes.

A-12 Data Channel Connection Data FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

DCE Mode
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.36/RS-449 DTE
interface. The V.36/RS-449 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected
to the FCD-E1LC CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable
(see Figure A-8) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1LC
side, and a 37-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable,
designated CBL-HS2R1, is available from RAD.
Cable wiring is given in Table A-10.

Figure A-8. V.36/RS-449 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

Table A-10. Wiring of V.36/RS-449 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 4

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 6

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 7

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) 9

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 11

7 SG Signal Ground 19

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 13

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) 26

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 31

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 35

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) 23

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) 27

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 22

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) 5

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 24

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) 8

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 25

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A)

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Data Channel Connection Data A-13

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 29

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 17

25 – Not connected –

DTE1 Mode
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.36/RS-449 DCE
interface that can accept, as its external clock, the receive clock signal provided
by the
FCD-E1LC data channel.
The V.36/RS-449 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the
FCD-E1LC CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see
Figure A-8) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1LC
side, and a 37-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable,
designated CBL-HS2R2, is available from RAD.
Cable wiring is given in Table A-11.

Table A-11. Wiring of V.36/RS-449 Adapter Cable for DTE1 Mode

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 6

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 4

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 13

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 12

7 SG Signal Ground 19

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 7

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) 35

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 25

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 26

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 24

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 22

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) 17

A-14 Data Channel Connection Data FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 31

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 24

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 8

25 – Not connected –

DTE2 Mode
This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.36/RS-449 DCE
interface that provides the transmit and receive clocks to the FCD-E1LC data
channel.
The V.36/RS-449 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the
FCD-E1LC CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see
Figure A-8) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1LC
side, and a 37-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable,
designated CBL-HS2R3, is available from RAD.
Cable wiring is given in Table A-12.

Table A-12. Wiring of V.36/RS-449 Adapter Cable for DTE2 Mode

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 6

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 4

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 13

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 12

7 SG Signal Ground 19

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 7

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) –

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 25

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 26

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 24

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Data Channel Connection Data A-15

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

FCD-E1LC Side Designation Function User’s Side

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 22

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) –

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 31

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) 5

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 24

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) 23

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 8

25 – Not connected –

A.4 V.24 Interface Connector

The DHS module with the V.24 interface is supplied with a 25-pin D-type female
connector. The pin allocation in the V.24 interface connector is given in
Figure A-9 identifies the pins of the V.24 connector.

Pin 13 Pin 1

Pin 25 Pin 14

Figure A-9. V.24 Connector, Pin Identification

A-16 V.24 Interface Connector FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

Table A-13. V.24 Connector Wiring

Pin Designation Direction Function

1 FGND – Frame ground

2 TD IN TX data

3 RD OUT RX data

4 RTS IN Request to send

5 CTS OUT Clear to send

6 DSR OUT Data set ready

7 SGND – Signal ground

8 DCD OUT Carrier detect

9 NC – –

10 NC – –

11 NC – –

12 NC – –

13 NC – –

14 NC – –

15 TC OUT TX CLK

16 NC – –

17 RC OUT RX CLK

18 LLB IN Local loop

19 NC – –

20 ERC OUT External RX CLK

21 RLB IN Remote loop

22 NC – –

23 NC – –

24 ETC IN External TX CLK

25 TM OUT Test mode

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 V.24 Interface Connector A-17

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

A.5 CONTROL DCE Connection Data

Connector Data
The CONTROL DCE port has an RS-232 DCE interface, intended for direct
connection to a supervision terminal that is terminated in a 9-pin D-type female
connector. CONTROL DCE pin assignment is given in Table A-14.

Table A-14. CONTROL DCE Connector Wiring

Pin Function Direction

1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) From FCD-E1LC

2 Receive Data (RD) From FCD-E1LC

3 Transmit Data (TD) To FCD-E1LC

4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) To FCD-E1LC

5 Ground (GND) ↔

6 Data Set Ready (DSR) From FCD-E1LC

7 Request to Send (RTS) To FCD-E1LC

8 Clear to Send (CTS) From FCD-E1LC

9 Ring Indicator (RI) To FCD-E1LC

Connection Data
The connection of the CONTROL DCE connector to a supervision terminal having a
9-pin D-type connector is made by means of a straight cable (a cable wired
point-to-point).The connection to a terminal with 25-pin D-type female
connector is made by means of a crossed cable, wired in accordance with
Figure A-10.

A-18 CONTROL DCE Connection Data FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

9-Pin Male
Connector 3
25-Pin Male
TD Connector
RD 2

RTS 7

To CONTROL DCE
Connector To Terminal

FCD-E1LC Side Terminal Side

Figure A-10. 25-Pin Terminal Cable Wiring – Connection to CONTROL DCE

Connector

A.6 Ethernet Port Connection Data

The optional Ethernet port has a 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface terminated in
an RJ-45 connector, designated 10/100BASE-T. The port supports automatic
MDI/MDIX detection and crossover, and therefore can be connected by any type
of cable (standard or cross-over) to any type of 10/100Base-T Ethernet port
(station or hub). The connector pin functions corresponding to the standard hub
pinout are listed in Table A-15.

Table A-15. ETH Interface Connector, Pin Functions

Pin Designation Function

1 RxD+ Receive Data input, + wire

2 RxD– Receive Data input, – wire

3 TxD+ Transmit Data output, + wire

4, 5 – Not connected

6 TxD– Transmit Data output, – wire

7, 8 – Not connected

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Ethernet Port Connection Data A-19

Appendix A Connection Data Installation and Operation Manual

A.7 Power Connection

Connector Data
FCD-E1LC units have one standard IEC three-pin socket for connection to power
(either DC or AC). Connector wiring is listed in Table A-16, together with a view of
the connector itself.

Table A-16. Power Connector Pin Functions

Function with AC Power Function with DC Power 100 240 VAC/ 48 / 60 VDC
Pin
Source Source

1 Return (0V) Ground (0V)

2 Chassis (Frame) Ground Chassis (Frame) Ground
RETURN POWER
3 Phase (Power) -48/-60 VDC

AC/DC Adapter Plug

The connection of the FCD-E1LC to a DC power source is made by means of a
special AC/DC adapter plug. This adapter, which plugs into the FCD-E1LC power
connector, has internal wire terminals for connecting the leads of the DC power
cable. See description of AC/DC adapter plug and instructions for connecting a DC
power cable in the RAD Supplement SUP-930: DC Power Supply Connection –
AC/DC Adapter (AD) Plug.

A-20 Power Connection FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Appendix B
SNMP Management
This appendix provides specific information related to the management of
FCD-E1LC units by means of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Some of the information presented in this Appendix is also applicable for
management using Telnet.
The information presented in this Appendix is organized as follows:
• Description of SNMP environment – Section B.1
• SNMP traps supported by FCD-E1LC – Section B.2
• Information on the handling of inband and out-of-band SNMP and Telnet
management traffic by the FCD-E1LC internal SNMP agent – Section B.3.

B.1 SNMP Environment

General
The SNMP management functions of the FCD-E1LC are provided by an internal
SNMP agent, which can use inband and out-of-band communication (see
Section B.3).
The SNMP management communication uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP),
which is a connectionless-mode transport protocol, part of the suite of protocols
of the Internet Protocol (IP).

Note Telnet management uses the TCP protocol over IP for management
communication. After a Telnet session is started, the management interface is
similar to that used for the supervision terminal.

This section covers the information related to the SNMP environment. For a
description of the IP environment, refer to Error! Cannot open file. .

SNMP Principles
The SNMP management protocol is an asynchronous command/response polling
protocol: the SNMP-based network management station, which addresses the
managed entities in its management domain, initiates all the management traffic.
Only the addressed managed entity answers the polling of the management
station (except for trap messages).
The managed entities include a function called an “SNMP agent”, which is
responsible for the interpretation and handling of the management station

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 SNMP Environment B-1

Appendix B SNMP Management Installation and Operation Manual

requests to the managed entity, and the generation of properly-formatted

responses to the management station.

SNMP Operations
The SNMP protocol includes four types of operations:
getRequest Command for retrieving specific management information from
the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a
getResponse message.
getNextRequest Command for retrieving sequentially specific management
information from the managed entity. The managed entity
responds with a getResponse message.
setRequest Command for manipulating specific management information
within the managed entity. The managed entity responds with
a setResponse message.
trap Management message carrying unsolicited information on
extraordinary events (e.g., alarms) reported by the managed
entity.

The Management Information Base

The management information base (MIB) includes a collection of managed
objects. A managed object is defined as a parameter that can be managed, such
as a performance statistics value.
The MIB includes the definitions of relevant managed objects. Various MIBs can be
defined for various management purposes, types of equipment, etc.
An object's definition includes the range of values and the “access” rights:
Read-only Object value can be read, but cannot be set.
Read-write Object value can be read or set.
Write-only Object value can be set, but cannot be read.
Not accessible Object cannot be read, nor set.

MIB Structure
The MIB has an inverted tree-like structure, with each definition of a managed
object forming one leaf, located at the end of a branch of that tree. A unique
path reaches each “leaf” in the MIB, therefore by numbering the branching
points, starting with the top, each leaf can be uniquely defined by a sequence of
numbers.
The formal description of the managed objects and the MIB structure is provided
in a special standardized format, called Abstract Syntax Notation 1 (ASN.1).
Since the general collection of MIBs can also be organized in a similar structure,
under the supervision of the Internet Activities Board (IAB), any parameter
included in a MIB that is recognized by the IAB is uniquely defined.
To provide the flexibility necessary in a global structure, MIBs are classified in
various classes (branches), one of them being the experimental branch, and
another the group of private (enterprise-specific) branch.

B-2 SNMP Environment FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B SNMP Management

Under the private (enterprise-specific) branch of MIBs, each enterprise

(manufacturer) can be assigned a number, which is its enterprise number.
The assigned number designates the top of an enterprise-specific sub-tree of
non-standard MIBs. Within this context, RAD has been assigned the enterprise
number 164. Therefore, enterprise MIBs published by RAD can be found under
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.
MIBs of general interest are published by the IAB in the form of a Request for
Comment (RFC) document. In addition, MIBs are also often assigned informal
names that reflect their primary purpose. Enterprise-specific MIBs are published
and distributed by their originator, which is responsible for their contents.

MIBs Supported by the FCD-E1LC SNMP Agent

The interpretation of the relevant MIBs is a function of the SNMP agent of each
managed entity. The general MIBs supported by the FCD-E1LC SNMP agent are as
follows:
• RFC 1213 (standard MIB-II).
• RFC 1406 (standard E1/T1 MIB).
In addition, the FCD-E1LC SNMP agent supports the RAD-private (enterprise-specific)
MIB identified as (read the following as a continuous string):
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).
rad(164).radGen(6).systems(1).radSysWAN(3).radFcdE1LC(27)
Enterprise-specific MIBs supported by RAD equipment, including those for the
FCD-E1LC, are available in ASN.1 format from the RAD Technical Support
Department.

Management Domains Under SNMP

In principle, SNMP enables any management station that knows the MIBs
supported by a device to perform all the management operations available on
that device. However, this is not desirable in practical situations, so it is
necessary to provide a means to delimit management domains.

SNMP Communities
To enable the delimitation of management domains, SNMP uses “communities”.
Each community is identified by a name, which is an alphanumeric string defined
by the user.
Any SNMP entity (this term includes both managed entities and management
stations) is assigned by its user a community name.

Access Restriction Using SNMP Communities

In general, SNMP agents support two types of access rights:
• Read-only: the SNMP agent accepts and processes only SNMP getRequest and
getNextRequest commands from management stations which have the same
read-only community name.
• Read-write: the SNMP agent accepts and processes all the SNMP commands
received from a management station with the same write community name.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 SNMP Environment B-3

Appendix B SNMP Management Installation and Operation Manual

In accordance with the SNMP protocol, the SNMP community of the originating
entity is sent in each message.
When an SNMP message is received by the addressed entity, first it checks the
originator's community. If the community name of the message originator differs
from the community name specified for that type of message in the agent, the
message it discarded (SNMP agents of managed entities report this event by
means of an authentication failure trap).

FCD-E1LC Communities
The SNMP agents of FCD-E1LC are programmed to recognize the following
community types:
Read SNMP community that has read-only authorization, i.e., the
SNMP agent will accept only getRequest and getNextRequest
commands from management stations using that community.
Write SNMP community that has read-write authorization, i.e., the
SNMP agent will also accept setRequest commands from
management stations using that community.
Trap SNMP community that the SNMP agent will send within trap
messages.

B.2 SNMP Traps

The FCD-E1LC SNMP agent supports the standard MIB-II traps.

B.3 Handling the Management Traffic

The FCD-E1LC management subsystem includes an SNMP agent.
The SNMP agent receives the management traffic through an internal router. This
router fulfills two main requirements:
• Ensures that the SNMP agent can receive and transmit management traffic
through all the inband and out-of-band management ports of the FCD-E1LC,
in accordance with user’s selections.
• Provides paths that enable management traffic received through one of the
FCD-E1LC ports to reach equipment connected to the other ports, as
explained below.
The following sections explain the way management traffic is handled by the
FCD-E1LC.

Note The management traffic handling capabilities described below are also applicable
to Telnet traffic.

B-4 Handling the Management Traffic FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B SNMP Management

Configuring the Out-of-Band Communication Mode

Out-of-band management communication uses the CONTROL DCE port.
To select the management mode, use the DEF SP command. Configure the
AUXILIARY_DEVICE parameter as follows:
• TERMINAL – when only the ASCII supervision terminal must be supported.
• SLIP-AGENT – when the supervisory port must support the SLIP protocol, and
is connected to the management station through another serial port that
supports SLIP (for example, the CONTROL DTE port of a
Megaplex-2100/2104).
In the SLIP-AGENT mode, the FCD-E1LC management traffic router generates
and accepts routing (RIP) requests and updates, and therefore it can
determine whether to send or not management traffic through the serial
port.
• NMS-SLIP – when the supervisory port must support the SLIP protocol, for
example SNMP or Telnet management, and is connected directly to the SNMP
management station or Telnet host.
The FCD-E1LC management traffic router will not accept routing information
messages when the port is configured as NMS-SLIP port.
• NMS-PPP – when the supervisory port must support the PPP protocol, for
example SNMP or Telnet management.

Configuring the Inband Communication Mode

Inband communication is supported through the main link.
For an FCD-E1LC equipped with a sublink, inband management is also possible
through this link.

Note Although the FCD-E1LC can accept and transfer management traffic toward the
sublink, this capability is provided only for enabling the management of the
equipment unit directly connected to the sublink through the FCD-E1LC main link,
or through the FCD-E1LC serial port. Therefore, the FCD-E1LC is not intended to
handle heavy management traffic (as needed to manage a network of managed
devices) toward the sublink.

Inband Communication Ports and Protocols

When using inband communication, you can select between the following
transmission protocols:
• Management traffic carried within the E1 frame overhead. This
communication mode uses the RAD proprietary protocol, which requires a
small bandwidth: the management traffic is carried by means of the national
bits, Sa4 through Sa8, in timeslot 0 (each bit can carry a data rate of 4 kbps).
• Management traffic carried in a dedicated timeslot. In addition to the RAD
proprietary protocol, this communication mode supports Frame Relay
encapsulation in accordance with RFC 1490.
When a dedicated timeslot is used, the management data rate is 64 kbps.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Handling the Management Traffic B-5

Appendix B SNMP Management Installation and Operation Manual

Inband Management Traffic Routing

The FCD-E1LC management traffic router uses the RAD proprietary routing
protocol whenever it operates in a network environment consisting of RAD
products.
In addition, you can configure the management traffic router to use standard
protocols (such as frame relay), when connecting directly to a router.
• The RAD proprietary routing protocol is used with timeslot 0 and the dedicated
timeslot option.
When the IP router function is configured to use the RAD proprietary
protocol, it collects information on the other SNMP agents by exchanging
routing information (including the contents of each router's routing table),
with its neighbors. This automatic learning capability enables using any
network topology, including topologies with closed loops.
• When the management traffic is carried in a dedicated timeslot, Frame Relay
encapsulation in accordance with RFC 1490 is also used. This enables Frame
Relay routers to carry the management traffic to the managed FCD-E1LC.
Frame Relay encapsulation is used as follows:
In the transmit direction, the SNMP agent encapsulates the management
messages in frames with a predetermined DLCI (always DLCI 100), and
sends them at the selected rate through the selected main and/or sublink
timeslot.
In the receive direction, the SNMP agent monitors the specified timeslot,
analyzes packets received with DLCI 100, and analyzes the received data
to detect management messages (any such messages are then processed
as usual).

Note The FCD-E1LC management traffic router does not support Frame Relay
management protocols (ANSI T1.617 Annex D, LMI, etc.), nor is such support
required.

The RAD proprietary protocol is more bandwidth-efficient, therefore it is

recommended to use it whenever feasible. However, its bandwidth is limited and
therefore it cannot be used when a high management traffic load is expected (for
example, when management traffic directed to many other RAD equipment units
passes though the FCD-E1LC main link).

B-6 Handling the Management Traffic FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Appendix C
Operating Environment
This appendix presents a concise description of the operating environment of
FCD-E1LC systems, to provide the background information required for
understanding the FCD-E1LC configuration and performance monitoring
parameters.
This Appendix covers the following issues:
• E1 environment – Section C.1.
• IP environment – Section C.2.
• Ethernet transmission technology – Section C.3.

C.1 E1 Environment
The E1 line interfaces of FCD-E1LC comply with the applicable requirements of
ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.711, G.732, G.736 and G.823.

E1 Signal Structure
The E1 line operates at a nominal rate of 2.048 Mbps, using a line signal encoded
according to High-Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) code. The data transferred over the
E1 line is organized in frames. Each E1 frame includes 256 bits.
The E1 frame format is shown in Figure C-1.
The 256 bits included in a frame are organized of 32 timeslots of eight bits each.
The frame repetition rate is 8,000 per second, therefore the data rate supported
by each timeslot is 64 kbps. The number of timeslots available for user data is
maximum 31, because timeslot 0 is always used for frame synchronization.
The frames are organized in larger patterns, called multiframes. Two types of
multiframes are generally used:
• G732N (also called 256N) multiframes.
• G732S (also called 256S) multiframes.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 E1 Environment C-1

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

Time Slot 0 Time Slot 16 Time Slots 1-15, 17-31

8 Bits per a. Even Frames (0,2,4-14) a. Frame 0

Time Slot 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 X Y X X

FAS MAS
Channel Data
b. Odd Frames (1,3,5-15) b. Frames 1-15
I 1 A N N N N N A B C D A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS
32 Time Slots/Frame 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR
16 Frames/Multiframe 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Notes
I International Bit ABCD ABCD Signaling Bits
N National Bits (Sa4 through Sa8) X Extra Bit
A Alarm Indication Signal (Loss of Frame Alignment - Red Alarm) Y Loss of Multiframe Alignment
FAS Frame Alignment Signal, occupies alternate MAS Multiframe Alignment Signal
(but not necessarily even) frames

Figure C-1. E1 Frame Format

G732N Multiframe
The G732N multiframe structure consists of two frames, which are identified by
means of the information included in timeslot 0:
• The even frame of the pair includes the frame alignment signal (FAS).
• The odd frame includes a “1” in bit position 2, and housekeeping information
in the other bits.
The number of timeslots available for user’s data is 31, and therefore the
maximum payload rate is 1984 kbps.

G732S Multiframe
The G732S multiframe includes 16 frames, which are identified by means of a
separate multiframe alignment signal (MAS) contained in timeslot 16 of frame
number 0 of each multiframe.
Since timeslot 16 must be reserved for the transmission of the MAS and system
signaling, only 30 timeslots are available for the user’s payload, and the maximum
payload rate is 1920 kbps.
When using the G732S multiframe format, timeslots 16 in the 16 frames of each
multiframe carry the following information:
• The first four bits of timeslot 16 of frame number 0 in multiframe 16 always
carry the multiframe alignment sequence, 0000.
• Bit 6 in timeslot 16 of frame number 0 in multiframe 16 is used to notify the
equipment at the other end of the link that the local equipment lost multiframe
alignment.
• The other bits of this timeslot are not assigned mandatory functions.

C-2 E1 Environment FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Operating Environment

E1 Line Signal
The E1 line signal uses the High-Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) code. The HDB3 coding
format is an improvement of the alternate mark inversion (AMI) code.
In the AMI format, “ones” are alternately transmitted as positive and negative
pulses, whereas “zeros” are transmitted as a zero voltage level. The AMI format
cannot transmit long strings of “zeros”, because such strings do not carry timing
information.
The HDB3 coding rules restrict the maximum length of a “zero” string to three
pulse intervals.
Longer strings are encoded at the transmit end to introduce non-zero pulses. To
allow the receiving end to detect the artificially introduced pulses and enable
their removal to restore the original data string, the encoding introduces
intentional bipolar violations in the data sequence. The receiving end detects
these violations and when they appear to be part of an encoded “zero” string – it
removes them.
Other bipolar violations may also be caused by transmission errors. Therefore,
any bipolar violations which cannot be interpreted as intentional coding violations
can be separately counted, to obtain information on the quality of the
transmission link.

Timeslot 0
Timeslot 0 of E1 frames is used for two main purposes:
• Delineation of frame boundaries. For this purpose, in every second frame,
timeslot 0 carries a fixed pattern, called frame alignment signal (FAS). Frames
carrying the FAS are defined as even frames, as they are assigned the
numbers 0, 2, 4, etc. when larger structures (multiframes) are used.
The receiving equipment searches for the fixed FAS pattern in the data
stream using a special algorithm, a process called frame synchronization.
Once this process is successfully completed, the equipment can identify each
bit in the received frames.
• Interchange of housekeeping information. In every frame without FAS (odd
frames), timeslot 0 carries housekeeping information. This information is
carried as follows:
Bit 1 - this bit is called the international (I) bit. Its main use is for error
detection using the optional CRC-4 function (CRC-4 stands for Cyclic
Redundancy Check, using a fourth-degree polynomial). This function is
described below.
Bit 2 is always set to 1, a fact used by the frame alignment algorithm.
Bit 3 is used as a remote alarm indication (RAI), to notify the equipment
at the other end that the local equipment lost frame alignment, or does
not receive an input signal.
The other bits, identified as Sa4 through Sa8, are designated national bits,
and are actually available to the users, provided agreement is reached as
to their use. RAD equipment with SNMP agents can use Sa bits for

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 E1 Environment C-3

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

carrying the inband management traffic. The total data rate that can be
carried by a national bit is 4 kbps.

E1 Line Statistics Using CRC-4 Error Detection

FCD-E1LC supports the CRC-4 function in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.704. The
CRC-4 function is used to detect errors in the received data, and therefore can be
used to evaluate data transmission quality over E1 links. This function can be
enabled or disabled by the user.
To enable error detection, additional information must be provided to the receiving
equipment. The additional information is transmitted to the receiving equipment by
using a multiframe structure called CRC-4 multiframes.
A CRC-4 multiframe is an arbitrary group of 16 frames. This group is not related in
any way to the G732S 16-frame multiframe structures explained above.
A CRC-4 multiframe always starts with an even frame (a frame that carries the
frame alignment signal). The CRC-4 multiframe structure is identified by a six-bit
CRC-4 multiframe alignment signal, which is multiplexed into bit 1 of timeslot 0 of
each odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, etc.) frame of the CRC-4 multiframe (i.e., in frames
1 through 11 of the CRC-4 multiframe).
Each CRC-4 multiframe is divided into two submultiframes of 8 frames (2048 bits)
each. The detection of errors is achieved by calculating a four-bit checksum on
each 2048-bit block (submultiframe). The four-checksum bits calculated on a
given submultiframe are multiplexed, bit by bit, in bit 1 of timeslot 0 of each
even-numbered frame of the next submultiframe.
At the receiving end, the checksum is calculated again on each submultiframe and
then compared against the original checksum (sent by the transmitting end in the
next submultiframe). The results are reported by two bits multiplexed in bit 1 of
timeslot 0 in frames 13, 15 of the CRC-4 multiframe, respectively. Errors are
counted and used to prepare statistic data on transmission performance.

E1 Line Alarm Conditions

• Excessive bit error rate. The bit error rate is measured on the frame
alignment signal. The alarm threshold is an error rate higher than 10-3 that
persists for 4 to 5 seconds. The alarm condition is canceled when the error
rate decreases below 10-4 for 4 to 5 consecutive seconds.
• Loss of frame alignment (also called loss of synchronization). This condition
is declared when too many errors are detected in the frame alignment signal
(FAS), e.g., when 3 or 4 FAS errors are detected in the last 5 frames. Loss of
frame alignment is cleared after no FAS errors are detected in two
consecutive frames. The loss of frame alignment is reported by means of the
A bit (see Figure C-1).

Note The A bit (bit 3 in timeslot 0 of the odd frames) serves as a remote alarm
indicator (RAI) notifying the other end equipment that the local equipment lost
frame alignment or does not receive an input signal.

C-4 E1 Environment FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Operating Environment

• Loss of multiframe alignment (applicable only when G732S multiframes are

used). This condition is declared when too many errors are detected in the
multiframe alignment signal (MAS) (same conditions as for loss of frame
alignment). The loss of multiframe alignment is reported by means of the Y
bit (see Figure C-1).
• Alarm indication signal (AIS). The AIS signal is an unframed “all-ones” signal,
and is used to maintain line signal synchronization in case of loss of input
signal, e.g., because an alarm condition occurred in the equipment that
supplies the line signal.

Note The equipment receiving an AIS signal loses frame synchronization.

C.2 IP Environment
This section describes the IP environment, to provide background information for
configuring the parameters that control the routing of management traffic.
The information presented in this section refers to Version 4 of the IP protocol
(IP4), currently the most widely used protocol version.

Introduction to IP
IP means “Internet Protocol”. The term IP protocol is often used to indicate a
standardized set of rules and procedures that enable data exchange through a
packet-switched network.
Accordingly, the term Internet indicates the set of networks that use the IP
protocol and are interconnected in a way that, at least in principle, permits any
entity on one network to communicate with any entity on another network.

Note The term “suite of IP protocols” is also often used, in recognition of the fact that
the operation of the Internet is actually defined by many related protocols.

IP Networks, IP Hosts and IP Ports

Any entity that can communicate using the IP protocol is called an IP host.
The connection point between an IP host and an IP network is called IP port.
An IP network forms when a number of IP ports can communicate directly (peer
to peer) using the IP protocol, without any intermediaries.
An IP host can have any number of IP ports. Moreover, the ports may be located
on different IP networks.

IP Addresses
To enable IP communication between two IP hosts, it is necessary to find a route
between their IP ports. For this purpose, each IP port is assigned an IP address.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 IP Environment C-5

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

An IP address is a number selected in accordance with the IP protocol. The only

purpose of an IP address is to permit unambiguous identification of an IP port.
Therefore, each IP port must be assigned a distinct and unique IP address.
The IP protocol does not require the IP port to be related in an unambiguous way
to a physical (communication) port. This has two main implications:
• Since the IP port is actually a connection to an IP network, any number of IP
ports can share a given physical port.
• An IP port may be reached through several physical ports.

Note By convention, the scope of IP addresses has been extended in two ways:
• To permit identification of IP networks
• To permit simultaneous addressing of all the ports connected to a IP network
(this operation is called broadcasting).

IP Packet Structure
The information exchanged through IP networks is organized in packets. The
structure of an IP packet, as specified by IP protocol Version 4, is shown in
Figure C-2 (the numbers are byte numbers):
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31

IP Version IP Header IP Type of Service Total IP Packet Length

(4) Length (IP TOS) (total number of octets in header + payload)

Fragment Identification Flags Fragment Offset

(16 bits) (3 bits) (13 bits)
(These fields are used for IP packet fragmentation)

Time to Live Number of IP Header Checksum

(Range: 0 to 255; Upper-Layer Protocol
when 0, packet is Carried in Payload
discarded) (IGMP = 2)
(UDP = 17)

Source IP Address

Destination IP Address

Options (when used) Padding (as required)

Payload (maximum bytes: 65535 – “header length”)

.
.
.

Figure C-2. IP Packet Structure

C-6 IP Environment FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Operating Environment

IP Address Structure
An IP address is a 32-bit number, represented as four 8-bit bytes. Each byte
represents a decimal number in the range of 0 through 255.
The address is written in decimal format, with the bytes separated by decimal
points, e.g., 164.90.70.47. This format is called dotted quad notation.
An IP address is logically divided into two main portions:
• Network portion
• Host portion.

Network Portion
In general, the network portion is assigned by the Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority (IANA), and its main purpose is to identify a specific IP network. For
exceptions, see the Global vs. Private IP Addresses section below.
There are five IP address classes: A, B, C, D, and E. However, only the A, B and C
classes are used for IP addressing. Consult your network manager with respect to
the class of IP addresses used on your network.
The network portion of an IP address can be one, two, or three bytes long, in
accordance with the IP address class. This arrangement is illustrated below:

IP Address
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4

Class A Network Portion Host Portion

Class B Network Portion Host Portion

Class C Network Portion Host Portion

The class of each IP address can be determined from its leftmost byte, in
accordance with the following chart:

Address Class First Byte Address Range

Class A 0 through 127 0.H.H.H through 127.H.H.H

Class B 128 through 191 128.N.H.H through 191.N.H.H
Class C 192 through 223 192.N.N.H through 223.N.N.H

where:
N – indicates bytes that are part of the network portion
H – indicates bytes that are part of the host portion.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 IP Environment C-7

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

Host Portion
In general, the host portion is used to identify an individual host connected to an
IP network. For exceptions, see Subnetting section below.
After obtaining an IP network address, the using organization is free to assign
host identifiers in accordance with its specific needs.

Note The following host identifiers have special meanings, and must not be assigned
to an actual host:
• The “all-zeros“ host identifier is interpreted as a network identifier.
• The “all-ones“ host identifier is interpreted as a broadcast address. Therefore,
a message with an “all-ones“ host identifier is accepted by all the hosts in the
network.

Global vs. Private IP Addresses

Given the current number of users already having access to the Internet, and the
rapid increase in this number, the 32-bit IP space address available in Version 4 of
the IP protocol is rather limited.
On the other hand, an IP address must permit unambiguous identification of any
host in the Internet. That is the reason the allocation of IP addresses to networks
is globally controlled by a universally-accepted IP registry organization (IANA).
Although any address used on the Internet must be unique, there are many IP
networks, called private networks, which are not connected to the Internet. A
private network is also created when the access of hosts to the Internet is
controlled by protocols and procedures that do not permit an outsider to find
and use directly the actual address of the hosts connected to that network. A
typical example of a private network is the internal IP network of an enterprise
(such networks are often called intranets).
In recognition of this fact, IANA permits using two types of addresses:
• Global addresses, i.e., addresses that and are unique in the whole Internet
• Private addresses, i.e., addresses allocated for internal use only and
therefore cannot be used on the Internet.
Although no restrictions need to be imposed on private addresses except for
conforming to the structure specified in the Network Portion section above,
the following address spaces have been specifically put aside by IANA for use
as private addresses:
The Class A addresses in the range of 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 (this
group of addresses is formally referred to as 10/8). This address space is
actually one Class A network number.
The Class B addresses in the range of 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255 (this
group of addresses is formally referred to as 172.16/12). This address
space defines 16 contiguous Class B network numbers.
The Class C addresses in the range of 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
(this group of addresses is formally referred to as 192.168/16). This
address space defines 256 contiguous Class C network numbers.

C-8 IP Environment FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Operating Environment

Subnetting
Given the scarcity of IP network addresses, for organizations operating several
relatively small, physically separated, IP networks, e.g., several departmental
networks, it is advantageous to enable several physical networks to share a
common IP network address. Small in this context means that the number of IP
ports connected to each of these networks is small relative to the host address
space for the corresponding IP address class.
The approach taken to enable the sharing of an IP network address by two or
more networks is called subnetting, which means use of subnets. The subnetting
is relevant only within the using organization, and therefore can be freely
selected to meet its specific needs.
To enable subnetting, the meaning of the bits in the host portion of the IP
address is further sub-divided into two portions:
• Subnet number. For example, subnet numbers can be used to identify
departmental subnets. The subnet number follows the network identifier.
• Host number – the last bits of the IP address.
This subdivision is illustrated below:

Net Number Subnet Number Host Number

For example, when the subnet includes 16 IP hosts, only the last four bits need
to be reserved for the host number. For an organization which obtained one
global Class C network address, this means that four bits are available to identify
subnets. Therefore, this organization can implement 16 IP subnets, each
comprising up to 16 hosts (except for two subnets that are limited to 15 hosts).

Subnet Masks
Subnet masks are used to indicate the division of the IP address bits between the
net and subnet portion and the host portion.
The mask is a 32-bit word that includes “ones” in the positions used for net and
subnet identification, followed by “zeros” up to the end of the IP address.
For example, the default subnet mask for any Class C address (i.e., all the eight
bits in the host address space are used for hosts in the same net) is
255.255.255.000.
However, if the same address is used in a subnet comprising up to 16 hosts and
for which the host numbers range is 00 to 15, the subnet mask changes as
follows:

IP Address 192 70 55 13
(Dotted-Quad)

IP Address (Binary) 1011 1111 0100 0110 0011 0111 0000 0111

Subnet Mask 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000
(Binary)

Subnet Mask 255 255 255 240

(Dotted-Quad)

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 IP Environment C-9

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

In most applications, the binary subnet mask is built as a contiguous string of

“ones”, followed by a number of “zeros” (the number of “zeros” is selected as
needed, to complete the number of subnet mask bits to 32). Therefore, when
this conventional approach is used, the subnet mask can also be specified simply
by stating the number of “ones” in the mask. For example, the subnet mask
shown above is specified by stating that it comprises 28 bits.

IP Routing Principles
The exchange of information between IP hosts is made in packets using the
structure specified by the IP protocol. As explained in the IP Packet Structure
section above, IP frames carry, within their header, the IP addresses of the
destination and source hosts.
In accordance with the IP protocol, an IP host checks the addresses of all the
received frames, and accepts only frames carrying its own IP address as the
destination.
The source address is then used to enable the destination to respond to the
source.
An IP host will also respond to broadcasts (frames whose destination host
identifier is “all-ones”).

Note IP hosts support additional protocols within the IP suite, e.g., protocols used for
connectivity checking, maintenance, etc. Therefore, IP hosts will accept additional
types of messages, which are beyond the scope of this description.

When checking the destination address of an IP frame, an IP host starts by

checking the network identifier. If the network identifier is different, the host will
immediately reject the frame. Therefore, IP hosts can communicate only if they
have the same network identifier.
For example, this means that when a management station managing the
FCD-E1LC is connected directly, through a LAN, to the FCD-E1LC Ethernet
management port, the network identifier part of the IP address assigned to the
FCD-E1LC Ethernet port must be identical to the network identifier of the
management station.
To enable hosts located on different IP networks to communicate, IP routers are
needed. Each router monitors the flowing IP traffic and identifies the IP
addresses of the local hosts connected to them, and then communicates this
information to all the other routers, using a special protocol (the Routing Internet
Protocol, RIP). Therefore, a router can determine to which other router to send a
packet with a foreign IP address.

Note RAD agents, for example, the management agent of the FCD-E1LC, also use a
RAD proprietary routing protocol, similar to RIP, for handling RAD management
traffic.

The user can increase the routing efficiency by specifying a default gateway to
handle IP traffic to other networks (this is always an IP router). When a default
gateway address is specified, packets with IP destinations located on other

C-10 IP Environment FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Operating Environment

networks are sent to the default gateway for processing: the router serving as
default gateway then sends them to their destination.
The default gateway must always be in the same IP subnet as the port sending
traffic to the gateway.

C.3 Ethernet Transmission Technology

Introduction to Ethernet Transmission

The basic standard covering Ethernet LANs is IEEE Standard 802.3, which is very
similar to the original Ethernet V2.0 specification (ISO/IEC also have a similar
standard). In addition to the aspects covered by IEEE 802.3 standards, there is a
wide range of LAN standards (the IEEE 802 family) that cover other aspects of
LAN transmission, for example, bridging, with particular emphasis on Ethernet
LANs.
Ethernet standards (in their broadest interpretation) cover the physical and data
link control layers (layers 1 and 2 in the OSI model; IP is a layer 3 protocol). The
data link control layer is split into two sublayers: media access control (MAC) and
logical link control (LLC).

Ethernet LAN Topologies

Figure C-3 shows the general structure of a LAN using the star topology, which
today is the most widely used topology.
10/100BaseT Ethernet Hub
SD

TX Pair
RX Pair

Figure C-3. Star (Hub-Based) Ethernet LAN Topology

In the star topology, all the nodes on the LAN are connected to a common unit,
which serves as the hub of the LAN. The hub can be implemented in two ways:
• Simple Ethernet hub, which detects the transmitting node and transparently
distributes its signal to all the other nodes. A hub supports only half-duplex
communication (the same as in a bus topology).
• Ethernet switch: the switch includes more sophisticated circuits that support
both half-duplex and full-duplex operation and prevent collisions.
In a star topology, the LAN cables are usually made of two twisted pairs (one
transmit pair and one receive pair). The standard connector type is RJ-45, and its

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Ethernet Transmission Technology C-11

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

pin assignment has also been standardized. However, because of the need to use
separate transmit and receive pairs, two types of port pin assignments have
developed: station ports and hub ports (the difference is that the transmit and
receive pins in the connector have been interchanged).
This permits to interconnect connectors of different types by a cable wired
pin-to-pin (straight cable). However, when it is necessary to interconnect ports
of same type, a crossed cable (a cable wired to interconnect the transmit pair at
one end to the receive pair at the other end) must be used (see other
alternatives on page C-13).
Interfaces operating on twisted pairs are designated in accordance with data
rate: 10Base-T (10 Mbps) or 100Base-TX (100 Mbps, where X is the number of
pairs). Interfaces that support both rates are identified as 10/100BaseT.

Ethernet Communication Protocol

Today, Ethernet is used as a generic term for a LAN transmission technology that
uses Carrier Sense and Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) to
enable the transmission of short bursts of data (called frames) between two or
more stations (nodes). The simplest way to visualize the transmission technology
is to use a bus analogy, where the bus runs between all the users.
Therefore, all the users have permanent access to the full bandwidth of the
transmission medium but can only use it for short times, by transmitting short
data bursts. Each data burst has a fixed structure, called a frame. The frame
structure is explained below. The connection point of each user to the
transmission media is called a node. For identification purposes, each LAN node is
assigned a unique number, called address.

Media Access Method

Media access is performed by means of the carrier sense, multiple access
protocol (CSMA) with collision detection (CD), defined by IEEE Standard 802.3.
The protocol defines three basic steps:
• A node that wants to transmit checks that the LAN is free. If another node is
already transmitting, the node waits until the LAN is free.
• When the LAN is free, the node starts transmission and sends its frame. Each
node has equal access rights, therefore the first node that starts transmitting
is the one that seizes the LAN.
• When two nodes start transmitting at the same instant, a collision occurs. In
this case, the transmitting nodes will continue to transmit for some time, in
order to ensure that all transmitting nodes detected the collision (this is
called “jamming”). After the jamming period, all transmitting nodes stop the
transmission and wait for a random period of time before trying again.
The delay times are a function of collision numbers and random time delay,
therefore there is a good chance that an additional collision between these
nodes will be avoided, and the nodes will be able to transmit their messages.
The basic procedure described above has been developed for half-duplex
communication, because it declares a collision whenever data is received during a
local transmission. However, when using twisted pairs, separate pairs are used

C-12 Ethernet Transmission Technology FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Operating Environment

for the transmit and receive directions. Therefore, each node is capable of
simultaneously transmitting and receiving (full-duplex operation), thereby
doubling the effective data rate on the LAN.
Most Ethernet interfaces are capable of operation at the two basic rates,
10 Mbps and 100 Mbps (such interfaces are designated 10/100BaseT). Therefore,
four operating modes are possible.
These modes are listed below in ascending order of capabilities:
• Half-duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
• Full-duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
• Half-duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
• Full-duplex operation at 100 Mbps.

Autonegotiation
To ensure interoperability (which practically means to select the highest transport
capability supported by all the equipment connected to the LAN), two approaches
can be used: manual configuration of each equipment interface, or automatic
negotiation (auto-negotiation) in accordance with IEEE Standard 802.3.
The auto-negotiation procedure enables automatic selection of the operating
mode on a LAN, and also enables equipment connecting to an operating LAN to
automatically adopt the LAN operating mode (if it is capable of supporting that
mode).
When auto-negotiation is enabled on all the nodes attached (or trying to attach)
to a LAN, the process is always successful. However, even if the nodes on an
operating LAN are manually configured for operation in a fixed mode, a
late-comer node with auto-negotiation capability can still resolve the LAN
operating rate can be resolved, thereby enabling it to adopt the LAN rate. Under
these conditions, an auto-negotiating node cannot detect the operating mode
(half or full duplex), and therefore they will default to half-duplex. Therefore, as a
practical configuration rule, the full-duplex mode should not be enabled without
enabling auto-negotiation, except when all the nodes have been manually
configured for the desired operating mode (which may of course be full duplex).
The standard protocol that permits intelligent 10/100BaseT Ethernet ports to
automatically select the mode providing the highest possible traffic handling
capability also provides the following additional capabilities:
Automatic detection and correction of MDI/MDIX crossover and polarity,
which enables connecting the FCD-E1LC Ethernet port to any other port
(station or hub) by any type of cable (straight or cross-wired)
Use of 802.3 flow control in the full-duplex mode and backpressure flow
control in the half-duplex mode.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Ethernet Transmission Technology C-13

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

Basic Ethernet Frame Structure

The frame transmitted by each node contains routing, management and error
correction information. For Ethernet LANs, the characteristics of frames are
defined by IEEE Standard 802.3.
Basic frame lengths can vary from 72 to 1526 bytes and have the typical
structure shown in Figure C-4.

72 to 1526 Bytes

Frame
Preamble SFD MAC Destination MAC Source Length/Type MAC Client Data
Padding Check
Address Address
Bytes Sequence
(7 Bytes) (1 Byte) (6 Bytes) (6 Bytes) (2 Bytes) (0 to 1500 Bytes)
(4 Bytes)

Start Frame
Delimiter

Figure C-4. Basic Ethernet Frame Structure

• Preamble. Each frame starts with a preamble of seven bytes. The preamble is
used as a synchronizing sequence for the interface circuits, and helps bit
decoding.
• Start-Frame Delimiter (SFD) field – consists of one byte. The SFD field
indicates where the useful information starts.
• Medium-Access (MAC) Destination Address (DA) field – consists of six bytes.
The MAC DA field carries the address of the destination node.
• Medium-Access (MAC) Source Address (SA) field – consists of six bytes. The
MAC SA field carries the address of the source node.

Note In writing, MAC addresses are represented as 6 pairs of hexadecimal digits,

separated by dashes, for example, 08-10-39-03-2F-C3.

• Length/Type field – consists of two bytes that indicate the number of bytes
contained in the logical link control (LLC) data field. In most Ethernet protocol
versions, this field contains a constant indicating the protocol type (in this
case, this field is designated EtherType).
• MAC Client Data field. The MAC client data field can contain 0 to 1500 bytes
of user-supplied data.
• Padding field. The optional padding field contains dummy data, that is used
to increase the length of short frames to at least 64 bytes.
• Frame Check Sequence (FCS) field – contains four check bytes generated by a
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code. The FCS field is used to detect errors in
the data carried in the frame.

C-14 Ethernet Transmission Technology FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Operating Environment

Bridging

Communication between Nodes on Same LAN

Unlike IP addresses, a MAC address is unique and identifies a single physical port.
Therefore, two Ethernet nodes attached to the same LAN exchange frame
directly, by specifying the desired MAC destination address, together with the
source MAC address. The node that identifies its MAC address in the destination
field can send a response by copying the source address of the frame to the
destination address field.

Communication between Nodes on Different LANs

To enable nodes on different LANs to communicate, it is necessary to transfer
frames between the two LANs. The device used for this purpose is called MAC
bridge, or just bridge. Two types of bridges are used:
• Local bridges, which have Ethernet ports attached to the two LANs. The
bridge control mechanism learns the nodes attached to each LAN by reading
the source MAC addresses of the frames generated by the nodes. When the
destination address of a frame is not on the LAN from which it was received,
the bridge transfers it to the other LAN.
• Remote bridges, which are used in pairs. A basic remote bridge has one LAN
port and one WAN port. The WAN port communicates through a link with the
WAN port of the remote bridge connected to the desired remote LAN. In this
case, the traffic addressed to destinations not located on the local LAN is
transferred through the WAN link to the remote bridge.

Using Virtual Bridged LANs

VLAN can be used to provide separation between traffic from different sources
sharing the same physical transmission facilities, and provide information on the
relative priority the user assigns to each frame. The characteristics and use of
virtual LANs (VLANs) and of the MAC bridges capable of handling tagged frames
are defined in IEEE Standard 802.1Q.
VLANs are made possible by a slight modification to the Ethernet frame structure
shown in Figure C-4.
The structure of an Ethernet frame with VLAN support is shown in Figure C-5
(for simplicity, the figure does not include the preamble and SFD fields).

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Ethernet Transmission Technology C-15

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31

Destination MAC Address (DA)

Destination MAC Address (DA) Source MAC Address (SA)

Source MAC Address (SA)

Tag Protocol Identifier (8100) PRI 0 VLAN ID

EtherType (IP = 0800) Ethernet Payload (42 to 1500 Bytes)

Ethernet Payload
.
.
.

CRC

Figure C-5. Structure of Ethernet Frame with VLAN Support

Ethernet frames with VLAN support include a tag header immediately after the
source MAC address (therefore, such frames are also referred to as tagged
frames).
The tag header comprises 4 bytes:
• Two bytes for the tag protocol identifier. For Ethernet-encoded tags in
accordance with IEEE802.1Q, these bytes carry the equivalent of 8100.
• Priority (PRI) specified by the user (3 bits: 7 is the highest priority and 0 is
the lowest priority). The priority field enables the user to instruct the network
to handle high-priority frames preferentially, for example, to reduce the delay
or minimize the chances for loss of frames in case of congestion.

Note The ToS field included in the IP packet headers (see Figure C-2) can also be used
to ensure preferential handling of certain types of packets.

• One bit for the canonical format indicator (always 0 as shown in Figure C-5).
• VLAN ID (12 bits), used to indicate the VLAN to which the frame belongs.

Transporting IP Traffic over Ethernet

Encapsulation in Ethernet Frames

IP traffic is carried in the LLC data field of the Ethernet frame (see Figure C-4).
This is called encapsulation. The EtherType value for the IP protocol is 0800.
Whenever possible, the whole IP packet (including the header) is inserted in one
Ethernet frame. However, IP packets can be much longer than the LLC data field
of Ethernet frames: in this case, it is necessary to fragment the IP packets in
accordance with the desired size of data field, and transfer each fragment in a
separate frame. The receiving IP host then reassembles the original packet from
its fragments.

C-16 Ethernet Transmission Technology FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Operating Environment

ARP Protocol
When sending IP packets over Ethernet, it is necessary to determine the MAC
address of the destination, to insert it in the Ethernet destination MAC address
of the packet. Actually, this is necessary for any physical transmission technology
which is not limited to point-to-point topologies.
This is performed by means of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol), part of the
IP suite of protocols. ARP is used to generate a look-up table that translates IP
addresses to MAC addresses for any transmission technology. The translation is
done only for outgoing IP packets, because this is when the IP header and the
Ethernet header are created.
The ARP table contains one row for each IP host: each row has two columns, one
listing the IP address and the other listing the corresponding MAC (Ethernet)
address. When translating an IP address to an Ethernet address, the table is
searched for the row corresponding to the destination IP address, and the
corresponding Ethernet address is then found in the same row.
Whenever a packet must be sent to a new IP destination, that is, a destination
whose MAC address is not known, the IP host sends an ARP request packet,
listing its own IP address and MAC address, the destination IP address, but no
destination MAC address. When the packet reaches the destination address
(using the IP routing process), the destination returns an ARP response packet, in
which its own MAC address field is filled. The packet eventually returns to the
sender, thereby providing the missing information.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Ethernet Transmission Technology C-17

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

C-18 Ethernet Transmission Technology FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Appendix D
Supervision Terminal
Commands

D.1 Introduction
This appendix provides a detailed description of the FCD-E1LC supervision
language. The information appearing in this appendix assumes that the user is
familiar with the FCD-E1LC system and with its configuration parameters. If
necessary, review Appendix C for a description of the FCD-E1LC operating
environment, Chapter 3 for a general description of the FCD-E1LC supervision
language syntax, and Chapter 1 for a functional description of the FCD-E1LC.
The commands described in this section are listed in alphabetical order (see the
Command Set Index table in Chapter 3 for a complete list). The description
includes the command format, usage, and options.
The following notational conventions are used:
[ ] square brackets indicate optional entry/parameter.
{ } accolades indicate required entry/parameter.
‘ ‘ single quotes delimit user entry.
<Enter> indicates the pressing of the Enter key.
<SP> indicates the pressing of the spacebar.
CC indicates the data channel number, 1 or 2.

Note The screens appearing in this appendix are given for illustration purposes only,
and must not be construed as providing typical parameter values. Parameter
values must be selected in accordance with the specific requirements of each
particular application. If necessary, contact RAD Technical Support Department.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Introduction D-1

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D.2 Commands

BYE
Purpose
End the current Telnet session.

Syntax & Use

To end the current Telnet session, type:
BYE<Enter>

CLR ALM

Purpose
Clear all the alarms stored in the alarm buffer (including ON/OFF alarms).

Syntax & Use

To clear all the alarms, type:
CLR ALM/A<Enter>

CLR LOOP

Purpose
Deactivate the specified user-initiated test or loopback.

Note The FCD-E1LC rear-panel E1/T1 LOOPBACK switch can also be used to deactivate
the following loopbacks:
• Main link local analog loopback
• Main link remote analog loopback
• Sublink local analog loopback
• Sublink remote analog loopback.
The functions of this switch are described in Chapter 2. To deactivate a loopback,
the corresponding switch section must be returned to OFF (if necessary, first set
it to ON, and then back to OFF).

Syntax
CLR LOOP

D-2 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Use
1. To deactivate all the main link loopbacks and tests, type:
CLR LOOP ML<Enter> or CLR LP ML<Enter>
To deactivate a specific main link loopback or test, type:
CLR LOOP LOC ANA ML<Enter> or CLR LP LOC ANA ML<Enter>
CLR LOOP REM ANA ML<Enter> or CLR LP REM ANA ML<Enter>
CLR LOOP LOC DIG ML<Enter> or CLR LP LOC DIG ML<Enter>
CLR LOOP REM DIG ML<Enter> or CLR LP REM DIG ML<Enter>
CLR LOOP BERT ML<Enter> or CLR LP BERT ML<Enter>
CLR LOOP INBAND ML<Enter> or CLR LP INBAND ML<Enter>
2. To deactivate all the sublink loopbacks and tests, type:
CLR LOOP SL<Enter> or CLR LP SL<Enter>
To deactivate a specific sublink loopback or test, type:
CLR LOOP LOC ANA SL<Enter> or CLR LP LOC ANA SL<Enter>
CLR LOOP REM ANA SL<Enter> or CLR LP REM ANA SL<Enter>
CLR LOOP LOC DIG SL<Enter> or CLR LP LOC DIG SL<Enter>
CLR LOOP REM DIG SL<Enter> or CLR LP REM DIG SL<Enter>
3. To deactivate a data channel loopback, type:
CLR LOOP LOC CH 1<Enter> or CLR LP LOC CH 1<Enter>
CLR LOOP LOC CH 2<Enter> or CLR LP LOC CH 2<Enter>
CLR LOOP REM CH 1<Enter> or CLR LP REM CH 1<Enter>
CLR LOOP REM CH 2<Enter> or CLR LP REM CH 2<Enter>

Note The deactivation of an inband loopback is made by repeatedly transmitting the

deactivation sequence, therefore the loopback can be considered as deactivated
only after approximately 2 seconds.

If no user-initiated loopback of the specified type is now performed, you will

receive ERROR 052: LOOP IS NOT ACTIVE.

DATE

Purpose
Set the date for the FCD-E1LC internal real-time clock.
The internal clock supports dates up to December 31st, 2099.

Syntax
DATE

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-3

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Use
1. To set the date, type:
DATE<Enter>
FCD-E1LC displays the date entry form:
DAY = 06

MONTH = 02

YEAR = 2004

4. Change by pressing <F> to increase and <B> to decrease the displayed

values. When done, press <Enter> to move to the next field.
5. To end, press <Enter> after the YEAR field.

DEF AGENT

Purpose
Display and modify the current SNMP agent parameters.
This command is used to configure the parameters needed to enable SNMP and
Telnet management.
Refer to Appendix B and Appendix C for background information.

Syntax
DEF AGENT

Use
1. To define the SNMP agent parameters, type:
DEF AGENT<Enter>
You will see the current agent parameters under the header OLD AGENT
PARAMETERS, followed by the entry row for the first parameter,
TELNET_APATHY_TIME.
2. Select the desired value by pressing <F> or <B>, then press <Enter> to
display the second row. Continue until all the parameters are defined, and
then press <Enter> to continue.
3. Once the next parameter is displayed, type in the new value, and then press
<Enter> to end.
A typical display, as seen after all the parameters are selected, is shown below:

D-4 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Telnet_APATHY_TIME
10 MIN

IP_ADDRESS IS : = 192.114.029.209

READ COMMUNITY IS : = public

WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = private

TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public

Table D-1 lists the agent parameters, along with their range of values and
instructions on how to modify them.
Table D-1. SNMP Agent Parameters

Parameter Function Values

TELNET_APATHY_TIME Selects the time, in minutes, after which a The available values are 10MIN,
Telnet connection will be automatically 15MIN, and 20MIN.
terminated if no incoming activity is Default: 10MIN
detected

IP_ADDRESS Type in the IP address assigned to the Use the dotted-quad format (four
FCD-E1LC SNMP agent groups of digits in the range of 0
through 255, separated by periods).
Default: 999.999.999.999

SNMP READ COMMUNITY Type in the name of the SNMP community Up to eight alphanumeric characters.
that has read-only authorization (the Default: public
FCD-E1LC SNMP agent will accept only
getRequest and getNextRequest
commands from management stations
using that community)

SNMP WRITE Type in the name of the SNMP community Up to eight alphanumeric characters.
COMMUNITY that has read-write authorization (the Default: private
FCD-E1LC SNMP agent will also accept
setRequest commands from management
stations using that community)

TRAP COMMUNITY Type in the name of the SNMP community Up to eight alphanumeric characters
to which the FCD-E1LC SNMP agent will Default: public
send traps

DEF ALM MASK

Purpose
Display and modify the alarm masks (masked alarms are not reported).
The alarm masks are used to disable the reporting of alarms by unused ports, and
stop the generation of alarms during maintenance.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-5

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Syntax
DEF ALM MASK

Use
1. To display the alarm mask data form, type:
DEF ALM MASK<Enter>
2. You will see the first row, used to select the group of alarms to be processed.
A typical display is shown below:
GROUP ALL
SYSTEM USER

The functions of the fields are as follows:

GROUP Selects the group of alarms to be processed:
SYSTEM System alarms
ML Main link alarms
SL Sublink alarms
CH1 Data channel 1 alarms
CH2 Data channel 2 or Ethernet port alarms.
ALL Enables the masking of all alarms:
MASK All the alarms of a specific group are masked.
USER You can define the individual alarms to be masked.
NORMAL None of the alarms in the specific group is masked.
3. Move the cursor to the desired field using the spacebar, and then change
using the <F> or <B> keys.
If you select MASK or NORMAL for ALL, press <Enter> to end.
If you select USER, select the desired group of alarms, and then press
<Enter> to display the group of alarms to be processed. A typical display
is shown below:
ALARM NUMBER & DESCRIPTION MASKED
04 ALARM BUFFER OVERFLOW NO

The functions of the fields are as follows:

ALARM NUMBER Displays the first alarm number (code and description) in
the selected group (see Chapter 4).
MASKED Enables the masking of the selected alarm:
YES The alarm is masked.
NO The alarm is not masked, and will be reported
when generated.
4. Select the desired state for the current alarm by pressing the <F> or <B> key,
and then press <Enter> to display the next alarm number. Repeat the

D-6 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

procedure until all the alarms in the selected group have been defined. After
the last alarm, you will see again the date and time, followed by the working
prompt.

DEF AR

Purpose
Control the use of SNMP traps for alarms reporting.

Syntax
DEF AR

Use
1. To configuration the use of traps for alarm reporting, type:
DEF AR<Enter>
FCD-E1LC displays the alarm data form.
ALARM REPORT
MAJOR ON NO

2. To display the next row, press <Enter>. A typical data form, as seen after all
the rows have been displayed, is shown below:
ALARM REPORT
MAJOR ON YES
MAJOR OFF YES
MINOR ON YES
MINOR OFF YES

The data form lists the relevant alarm conditions, and the action to be taken
for each alarm condition. The following fields appear on the data form:
ALARM The reported condition:
MAJOR ON A new major alarm condition has been detected.
MAJOR OFF The major alarm condition disappears.
MINOR ON A new minor alarm condition has been detected.
MINOR OFF The minor alarm condition disappears.
REPORT The response to the corresponding condition:
YES – the corresponding alarm condition is reported by means of
a trap sent to management stations.
NO – the corresponding alarm does not result in a trap.
3. To change the current selections, bring the cursor to the desired field, and
then press the <F> or <B> keys to display the desired selection (YES or NO).
When done, press <Enter> to end.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-7

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

DEF BERT ML
Purpose
Define the BERT test conditions. Refer to Table D-2 for the parameter
description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Syntax
DEF BERT

Use
1. To define the BER test parameters, type:
DEF BERT ML<Enter>
The first row of the BERT parameters data form is displayed:
PATTERN ERROR_INJECTION_RATE RX_INBAND INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN BERT_MODE
2E23-1 NO_ERR DISABLE USER CONFIG USER

2. If you choose USER CONFIG, the second row of the data form is displayed:
USER_PATTERN_LEN USER_ACTIVATE_PAT
1 XXXXXXX0

3. Select the length of the user-selected. After pressing <Spacebar>, the cursor
moves to the first place in the USER_ACTIVATE_PAT field, which contains a
template used to specify the activation pattern. The template enables
changing the selected number of binary places (these are always the last
places). Move the cursor (by pressing <Spacebar>) to each desired position
and set the corresponding digit in the template to 0 or 1 by pressing <F> or
<B>.
4. When done, press <Enter> to display the third row of the data form.
USER_PATTERN_LEN USER_DEACTIVATE_PAT
1 XXXXXXX0

5. Select the user deactivation pattern using the procedure of Step 3.

6. After making the required selections, press <Enter> to end.

Table D-2. BERT Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values

PATTERN Selects the test pattern for the data The available selections are the QRSS test
channel pattern and the following pseudo-random
sequences: 511, 2047, 2E15-1, 2E23-1.
Default: 2E23-1

ERROR_INJECTION_ Enables the injection of a calibrated NO ERR – Disables the injection of errors.
RATE rate in the transmitted test pattern SINGLE – Injects a single error when <I> is
pressed (see DSP BERT command).
10E-1 – Error injection at a rate of 10 .
-1

Default: NO ERR

D-8 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Table D-2. BERT Configuration Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Function Values

RX_INBAND Enables the activation of a main link ENABLE – Inband loopback command
remote digital loopback in response accepted.
to the reception of the inband DISABLE – Inband loopback command
loopback code from the remote ignored.
system
Default: DISABLE

INBAND_LOOP_ Selects the type of loopback RDL LOOP – Use of the FT1/FE1 RDL
PATTERN activation and deactivation sequence in accordance with T1.403.
sequences USER CONFIG – Use of user-defined
patterns.
Default: RDL LOOP

BERT_MODE Selects the main link timeslots in CH1 – The BER test will be made in the
which the BER test will be performed timeslots assigned to data channel 1.
CH2 – The BER test will be made in the
timeslots assigned to data channel 2.
S1 – The BER test will be made in the
timeslots assigned to the sublink.
USER – The BER test will be made in the
timeslots selected by the user.
Default: CH1

USER_PATTERN_LEN Defines the length of the The allowed range is 1 to 8.

user-defined activation or Default: 1
deactivation sequence.
This field is displayed only when
INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN is USER
CONFIG

USER_ACTIVATE_PAT Used to specify a loopback Select 1 or 0 for each changeable place in

activation pattern. the template.
This field is displayed only when Default: 0
INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN is USER
CONFIG

USER_DEACTIVATE_ Used to specify a loopback Select 1 or 0 for each changeable place in

PAT deactivation pattern. the template.
This field is displayed only when Default: 0
INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN is USER
CONFIG

If the BERT_Mode parameter is USER, then after pressing <Enter> to end the
selection of the loopback deactivation pattern you will see the first row of the
timeslot selection map. A typical display is shown:
TS 01 TS 02 TS 03 TS 04 TS 05 TS 06 TS 07
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-9

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Use the following procedure to select the required timeslots:

• Move the cursor to the desired timeslot field by pressing the spacebar.
• To enable BER testing in this timeslot, type <F> or <B> to change the
selection to YES.
The default, NO, means that the timeslot can continue to carry payload while
a BER test is performed.
• After making the selections in the first line, press <Enter> to continue to the
second line (timeslots 8 to 14).
• Repeat the operations until the last line, ending in timeslot 31, is completed.

DEF CALL

Purpose
Define the call-out parameters for the FCD-E1LC dial-out function.
The specified call-out parameters are used by FCD-E1LC to build the call
command that is sent to the dial-out modem. The modem connected to the
CONTROL DCE connector must be set up as follows (for convenience, the Hayes
commands required to select the specified parameters are listed in brackets):
• Auto-answer mode (AT S0=1)
• Call set up in response to the CONNECT string (AT X0)
• No echo (AT E0)
• Verbose mode (no codes, e.g., CONNECT string instead of 0) (AT V1).

Syntax
DEF CALL

Use
1. To define the call-out parameters, type:
DEF CALL<Enter>
You will see the first page of the call-out parameters data form. A typical
display is shown below.
NUM_OF_RETRIES WAIT_FOR_CONNECT DIAL_MODE
ALT_NUM_NUMBER
0 30SEC TONE NO

2. Change the parameter values as follows:

Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by
pressing the spacebar.
To change the selected field, press <F> or <B> to scroll among the
available selections.

D-10 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

When the desired selection is displayed, press the spacebar to move to

the next field.
The call-out parameters displayed on the first page of the data form, and
their range of values, are explained in Table D-3.
3. When done, press <Enter> to display the second page of the call-out
parameters data form. A typical display is shown below.
NEW PRIMARY NUMBER [MAX 16 CHARS] =

4. Enter a new primary directory number and press <Enter>. The directory
number can include up to 16 digits, including the # and the * symbols.
FCD-E1LC displays the new primary directory number you have entered.
CURRENT PRIMARY DIAL COMMNAND = 'primary number'

5. Press <Enter>:
If the ALT_NUM_MODE parameter is NO (no alternate number), FCD-E1LC will
display the time and date, followed by the FCD-E1LC prompt.
If the ALT_NUM_MODE parameter is YES, press <Enter> to see the third page
of the call-out parameters data form, used to enter a new alternate directory
number. A typical display is shown below.
NEW ALTERNATE NUMBER [MAX 16 CHARS] =

6. Enter a new alternate directory number and press <Enter>. The directory
number can include up to 16 digits, including the # and the * symbols.
FCD-E1LC displays the new alternate directory number you have entered.

CURRENT ALTERNATE DIAL COMMAND = 'alternate number'

7. After entering the desired directory number, press <Enter> to end.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-11

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Table D-3. Call-Out Parameters

Parameter Function Values

NUM_OF_ This parameter is used to control the number of 0 No redialing attempts are made
RETRIES dialing retries. if the call is not established on
The NUM_OF_RETRIES parameter applies to both the first attempt.
the primary and the alternate numbers: 1 to 8 If the call is not established on
• If the call is not established after dialing the the first attempt, FCD-E1LC will
primary directory number the specified redial the specified number of
number of times, FCD-E1LC attempts to times.
establish the call by dialing the alternate Default: 0
directory number (provided the use of an
alternate number is enabled by means of the
ALT_NUM_MODE parameter).
• If the call cannot be established within the
specified number of redialing attempts on
neither of the two directory numbers,
FCD-E1LC stops the call attempts. When a
new alarm report must be sent, the call
attempts are started again. The user is
notified that the call attempts failed by a
message recorded in the alarm buffer
(separate messages are provided for each
directory number).

WAIT_FOR_ This parameter specifies the time FCD-E1LC will The available selections are 30, 45, or 60
CONNECT wait for an answer after each dialing attempt. If seconds.
the called station does not answer within the Default: 30
specified time, FCD-E1LC disconnects. If
additional call attempts are allowed, FCD-E1LC
will redial immediately after disconnecting.

DIAL_MODE This parameter is used to select the dialing TONE The modem is instructed to use
mode. DTMF dialing.
Select the dialing mode supported by the PULSE The modem is instructed to use
telephone network. pulse dialing.
Default: TONE

ALT_NUM_ This parameter is used to control the use of an NO No alternate number. In this case,
MODE alternate number. The alternate number is the FCD-E1LC stops the call
dialed after the specified number of call attempts after the specified
attempts on the primary number failed. number of call attempts on the
primary number failed.
YES The use of an alternate number is
enabled.
Default: NO

D-12 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

DEF CH

Purpose
Define the data channel parameters, and assign its timeslots on the main link.
The displayed data form depends on the channel interface – serial synchronous
interface or Ethernet interface (option available only for channel 2).

Syntax
DEF CH CC

Use – Serial Data Channel

1. To define the parameters of the desired data channel, type:
DEF CH CC<Enter>
where CC is the number of the desired channel, 1 or 2.
The first row of the selected channel parameters data form is displayed.
A typical form is shown below.
MULTIPLIER SPEED FIFO_SIZE CLOCK MODE CTS
CLOCK_POLARITY
64 NC AUTO DCE ON NORMAL

Refer to Table D-4 for the parameter description, allowable ranges and
configuration guidelines.
2. Change the desired parameters and then press <Enter> to display the
timeslot mapping parameters row. A typical form is shown below.
MAP_MODE START_TS TS_TYPE
SEQ 1 DATA

3. Select the MAP_MODE and then press <Enter>.

4. If in Step 3 the MAP_MODE has been set to SEQ:
Press the spacebar to move to the START_TS field, and then press <F> or
<B> to select the desired starting timeslot.
Press the spacebar to move to the TS_TYPE field, and then press <F> or
<B> to select DATA.
Press <Enter>. The command is ended and the FCD-E1LC will display the
time and date, followed by the FCD-E1LC prompt.
5. If the MAP_MODE has been set to USER, the START_TS and TS_TYPE fields are
automatically set to N/A. In this case, press <Enter> to continue.
You will see the first row of the data channel timeslot assignment map. A
typical display is shown below:

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-13

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

TS : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TYPE : NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

Use the spacebar to move between timeslots. For each timeslot, select
between DATA (timeslot assigned to this data channel) and NO (not
assigned) by pressing <F> or <B>.
After completing the first row, press <Enter> to continue to the next row.
Repeat the procedure until all the timeslots (up to timeslot 31) are
configured.

Note • You cannot perform mapping if the main link framing mode is UNFRM .
• Make sure to select enough timeslots to support the selected data rate are
defined.
• The maximum number of timeslots that can be connected is 31, however
when the main link framing mode is G732S, it is not allowed to connect to
timeslot 16.
• If you already selected an inband management timeslot (using the DEF
DNLOAD command), that timeslot type appears as DEDIC and cannot be
changed.

6. Pressing <Enter> after the last timeslot ends the command.

D-14 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Table D-4. Serial Data Channel Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

MULTIPLIER Selects the group of 64 – All the selectable data Select the data rate used by the
rates that can be rates are multiples of equipment connected to the data
selected in the 64 kbps. channel.
SPEED field 56 – All the selectable data If the main link is configured for
rates are multiples of unframed operation, the data
56 kbps. For this selection, rate of channel 1 for an
bit 8 of each timeslot carrying FCD-E1LC with one serial data
the channel data is set to channel, or channel 2 for an
“1”. FCD-E1LC with two serial data
Default: 64 channels, is automatically set to
2048 kbps, and its payload is
routed to the main link. In this
case, SPEED and MULTIPLIER
parameters are not relevant.

SPEED Indicates the channel Multiples of the basic rate Select the data rate used by the
data rate (for an (64 or 56 kbps, or NC (not equipment connected to the data
Ethernet LAN connected)). channel.
interface, indicates The multiples are in the range The data rate is a multiple n, of
the throughput) of 1 to 31, resulting in rates the basic rate. n, in the range of
of 64, 128, 192, ..., 1 through 31, actually indicates
1984 kbps or 56, 112, 168, …, the number of main link
1736 kbps, respectively. timeslots that are needed to
When the main link framing carry the data stream connected
mode is G732S, the maximum to the channel.
is 30, resulting in a maximum
payload rate of 1920 kbps or
1680 kbps, respectively.
Default: NC

FIFO_SIZE Selects the size of AUTO – Automatic size In the DCE and DTE1 timing
the FIFO buffer used selection in accordance with modes, it is not necessary to
in the data channel the jitter that must be increase the FIFO size because
tolerated at each data rate. the buffer size is automatically
32, 60, 104, 144 – Buffer set by FCD-E1LC.
size, in bits (corresponds to If the DTE2 mode is used and the
FIFO lengths of ±16, ±30, ±52 jitter expected in your specific
and ±72 bits). application is higher than what
Default: AUTO can be tolerated when using the
automatically selected size, you
can manually select a FIFO size
greater than the AUTO size.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-15

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Table D-4. Serial Data Channel Configuration Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

CLOCK MODE Selects the timing DCE – FCD-E1LC data port Select the timing mode in
mode of this user operates as a DCE and accordance with the type of
data channel. provides transmit and receive equipment connected to the user
When configuring clocks to the synchronous data channel:
channel 2 for an user DTE. • DCE – For direct connection
FCD-E1LC with DTE1 – FCD-E1LC data port to a synchronous DTE.
Ethernet interface, supplies the receive clock to • DTE1 – For connection via a
only the DCE mode is the user equipment and modem with external clock or
supported, and accepts the user transmit another equipment that
therefore the timing clock. accepts a receive clock and
clock mode cannot DTE2 – FCD-E1LC data port outputs a transmit clock.
be changed requires transmit and receive • DTE2 – For connection via a
clocks from the user modem or other type of
equipment. equipment (such as a
Default: DCE multiplexer), that provides
both receive and transmit
clocks. You must select this
mode when FCD-E1LC timing
is to be locked to an external
clock (see CLK MASTER), or
the external clock is intended
for use as a fallback reference
(see CLK FBACK).

Note: The accuracy and stability

of the external source clock must
be compatible with system
requirements, otherwise severe
disruptions in network operation
may occur.

CTS Selects the state of ON – CTS line continuously Select in accordance with the
the CTS line in the on. desired operation mode of the
data channel =RTS – CTS line tracks the channel.
interface. RTS line. In general, you should use =RTS
When configuring Default: ON for operation in the polling mode.
channel 2 for an In this case, when the RTS line is
FCD-E1LC with OFF, the local FCD-E1LC channel
Ethernet interface, continuously sends MARK in its
this parameter is not main link timeslots.
applicable Note: When the CTS line is not
active (CTS=OFF), the user data
interface generates an “all-ones”
signal, transmitted via the main
link to the far end.

D-16 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Table D-4. Serial Data Channel Configuration Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

CLOCK POLARITY Selects the polarity NORMAL – Rising edge of the Select INVERT only when
of the clock signal, clock waveform appears in specifically instructed to do so.
relative to the data. the middle of the bit interval.
When configuring INVERT – The falling edge of
channel 2 for an the clock waveform appears
FCD-E1LC with in the middle of the bit
Ethernet interface, interval.
this parameter is Default: NORMAL
fixed at NORMAL

MAP MODE Selects the timeslot USER – Free user selection of Select the desired mode, in
assignment method timeslots. accordance with system
used for the data SEQ – Sequential assignment requirements.
channel of timeslots, starting from a Remember that the number of
user-specified slot. main link timeslots to be
Default: USER assigned must always be equal to
n, the multiple of the basic rate
that determines the channel data
rate. Therefore, when you select
the SEQ mode and a starting
timeslot, FCD-E1LC attempts to
allocate the required number, n,
of timeslots to the channel.
Timeslot 16 is automatically
skipped when G732S framing is
used on the main link, however
all the other timeslots within the
required range are automatically
included. This may result in
conflicts with previous
assignments.
Such conflicts are automatically
detected and reported by error
messages. In case of conflict, you
may use the USER mode to
assign the desired free timeslots
to the data channel, until the
required number of timeslot is
reached.

Note: All the timeslots assigned

to the data channel are always
defined as data timeslots; this,
however, does not preclude their
use as voice channel carriers.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-17

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Table D-4. Serial Data Channel Configuration Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

START_TS Selects the first The allowed range is 1 to 31. When selecting a starting
timeslot assigned to Default: 1 timeslot, you must consider the
the data channel number of timeslots that need to
be allocated to support the
selected data rate

TS_TYPE Selects the first NC – Not connected . All the timeslots assigned to the
timeslot assigned to DATA – Timeslots connected data channel are always defined
the data channel and handled as if carrying as data timeslots
data (transparently transfer
through the main link).
Default: USER

Use – Ethernet Port

1. To define the parameters of the Ethernet port, type:
DEF CH 2<Enter>
The first row of the Ethernet port parameters data form is displayed. A
typical row is shown below.
This row is similar to that displayed for serial data channels, except that
the CLOCK MODE field is always DCE, CTS is always N/A and
CLOCK_POLARITY is always NORMAL.
MULTIPLIER SPEED FIFO_SIZE CLOCK MODE CTS
CLOCK_POLARITY
64 64 KBPS AUTO DCE N/A
NORMAL

2. Change the desired parameters and then press <Enter> to display the
Ethernet port configuration parameters row.
A typical Ethernet port configuration parameters row is shown below.
AUTO_NEGOTIATION ETHERNET MODE BRIDGING ETH_SPEED
FLOW_CONTROL
ENABLE N/A TRANS N/A
ENABLE

3. Change the desired parameters and then press <Enter> to display the
timeslot assignment parameters row. A typical form is shown below.
MAP_MODE START_TS TS_TYPE
SEQ 1 DATA

4. When done, press <Enter>.

Refer to Table D-4 for a description of the parameters common to both the
Ethernet port and the serial data channels, and to Table D-5 for a description of
the specific Ethernet port parameters.

D-18 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Table D-5. Ethernet Port Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

AUTO_ Controls the use of ENABLE – Auto-negotiation is Use auto-negotiation

NEGOTIATION auto-negotiation for enabled. whenever the equipment
the Ethernet port. DISABLE – Auto-negotiation is connected to the same LAN
Auto-negotiation is disabled. supports this capanility
used to Default: ENABLE
automatically select
the mode providing
the highest possible
traffic handling
capability

ETHERNET MODE Selects the Ethernet HALF – Half duplex operation. Select in accordance with
LAN traffic transfer FULL – Full duplex operation. the capabilities of the
mode when equipment connected to the
Default: HALF
auto-negotiation is same LAN with the
disabled. FCD-E1LC.
This parameter is not
relevant when
auto-negotiation is
enabled (set to N/A
and cannot be
changed)

BRIDGING Selects the Ethernet FILTER – The internal bridge of

traffic processing FCD-E1LC is enabled, and filters
mode the traffic transferred to the
remote end.
TRANS – The internal bridge of
FCD-E1LC is disabled, and the
Ethernet traffic is transparently
transferred (LAN extender
function).
Default: TRANS

ETH_SPEED Selects the LAN rate 10Mbps – operation at 10 Mbps. Select in accordance with
mode when 100Mbps – operation at the capabilities of the
auto-negotiation is 100 Mbps. equipment connected to the
disabled. same LAN with the
Default: 100Mbps
This parameter is not FCD-E1LC.
relevant when
auto-negotiation is
enabled (set to N/A
and cannot be
changed)

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-19

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Table D-5. Ethernet Port Configuration Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

FLOW_CONTROL Controls the use of DISABLED – Flow control is The method used for flow
flow control for the disabled. control depends on the
Ethernet port ENABLED – Flow control is operating mode:
enabled. This selection is possible • Back pressure for the
only when auto-negotiation is half-duplex mode
enabled. • Sending of Pause frames
Default: DISABLED when operating in the
full-duplex mode

DEF DNLOAD

Purpose
Define the inband management communication parameters. Refer to Table D-6
for the parameter description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Syntax
DEF DNLOAD {[ML] [SL]}

Use
1. To define the main link inband management communication parameters,
type:
DEF DNLOAD ML<Enter>
To define the sublink management communication parameters, type:
DEF DNLOAD SL<Enter>
The first row of the data form is displayed. A typical row is shown below:
DNLOAD MODE
TS0/F

2. Select the desired mode, and then press <Enter>.

If the FRAME RL mode is selected, the following row appears:

TS_NUM SPEED
1 64

3. Select the desired timeslot. The management data rate is always 64 kbps.
4. When done, press <Enter>.
The following row appears:

D-20 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

SA_BIT_4 SA_BIT_5 SA_BIT_6 SA_BIT_6 SA_BIT_8

MGMT ONE ZERO ZERO ZERO

Select the data to be carried by each of the Sa4 to Sa8 bits:

ONE or ZERO if the selected download mode is FRAME RL
ONE or ZERO or MGMT if the selected download mode is TS0/F. In this
case, at least one of the bits must be set to MGMT.
5. When done, press <Enter> to end.

Table D-6. Download Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

DNLOAD Selects the inband NONE – Inband SNMP and Telnet After changing the download
MODE transmission mode for traffic is ignored and FCD-E1LC does mode from FRAME_RL to
the selected link. not generate such traffic. TS0/F and vice versa, you
TS0/F – Inband SNMP and Telnet must reset the FCD-E1LC to
traffic is received and transmitted in make the changes in
timeslot 0. management effective (use
the RESET command).
FRAME_RL – Inband SNMP and
Telnet traffic is received and
transmitted in a dedicated,
user-selected timeslot, using the
Frame Relay protocol.
Default: NONE

TS NUM Selects the dedicated Any number in the range of 1 This parameter is displayed
timeslot used for the through 31, consistent with the only when the Frame Relay
selected link. available timeslots and the link mode is selected
framing mode.
Default: 1

SPEED Selects the data rate Always 64 kbps This parameter is displayed
used to transfer inband only when the Frame Relay
management traffic for mode is selected.
the selected link.

SA4 Controls the handling of MGMT The Sa4 bit is used to carry When the INB_MNG
the national bit Sa4. inband management traffic. parameter is TS0/F, at least
ZERO The Sa4 bit is set to “0” one of the bits must be set
before it is transferred to to MGMT.
the Sa4 bit of the external E1
interface.
ONE Same as above, except the
Sa4 bit is set to “1”.
Default: ONE
SA5 Controls the handling of Same options as for SA4
the national bit Sa5 by the
corresponding port

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-21

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

SA6 Controls the handling of Same options as for SA4

the national bit Sa6 by the
corresponding port
SA7 Controls the handling of Same options as for SA4
the national bit Sa7 by the
corresponding port
SA8 Controls the handling of Same options as for SA4
the national bit Sa8 by the
corresponding port

DEF MANAGER LIST

Purpose
Define or modify the network management stations to which the SNMP agent of
this FCD-E1LC system will send traps. Up to five managers can be defined.

Syntax
DEF MANAGER LIST

Use
1. To define a management station, type:
DEF MANAGER LIST<Enter>
You will see the current list of managers, in the following format:
OLD MANAGERS LIST PARAMETERS
MANAGER 1 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.168.238.001
MANAGER 1 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.240
MANAGER 2 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.168.200.253
MANAGER 2 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.000
MANAGER 3 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.168.238.203
MANAGER 3 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.240
MANAGER 4 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.114.029.209
MANAGER 4 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.000
MANAGER 5 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.168.238.196
MANAGER 5 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.240

After the current table, you will see the first row of the managers list data
form, which is used to define the IP address of the first management
station.
2. Type in the IP address of the desired management station. Use the dotted-quad
format (four groups of digits in the range of 0 through 255, separated by
periods).

D-22 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

3. After filling in the required address, press <Enter> to display the next row,
and then type in the subnet mask in the dotted-quad format. The mask
consists of four groups of digits in the range of 0 to 255, separated by
periods. The mask specified by these digits must consist of consecutive “1”s,
followed by consecutive “0”s.
A typical data form, as seen after both rows used to define the first
management station have been filled in, is shown below:
MANAGER 1 IP ADDRESS 172.165.68.221
MANAGER 1 SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.000

4. Repeat Step 3 to define the additional management stations (2 through 5).

5. After pressing <Enter> for the subnet mask of the fifth manager, you will see
the full updated list, and the command ends.

DEF ML
Purpose
Define the main link parameters.

Syntax
DEF ML

Use
1. To define the main link parameters, type:
DEF ML<Enter>
You will see the main link parameters data form. A typical data form is
shown below:
FRAME CRC-4 SYNC RX_GAIN IDLE_TS_CODE
RAI
G732N NO CCITT SHORT 3F
DISABLE

2. Select the desired parameters in accordance with Table D-7, and then press
<Enter>.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-23

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Table D-7. Main Link Configuration Parameters

Designation Function Values Configuration Guidelines

FRAME Selects the framing mode G732N – G.732N frame Select the framing mode
for the main link structure (2 frames per specified for use in your
multiframe) in accordance with network.
ITU-T Rec. G.732. Timeslot 16 For transmission of unframed
can be used for user payload, data, select UNFRM for the
for a total of 31 payload main link. For a
timeslots. single-channel FCD-E1LC, the
G732S – G.732S frame structure data rate of channel 1 is
(16 frames per multiframe) in automatically set to
accordance with ITU-T Rec. 2048 kbps. If FCD-E1LC has
G.732. Leaves 30 timeslots for two data channels, the data
user payload. rate of channel 2 is
UNFRM – Unframed G.703 automatically set to
signal, carrying payload of a 2048 kbps.
data channel. The appropriate
data channel is automatically
selected: channel 1 for an
FCD-E1LC with one serial data
channel, and channel 2 for an
FCD-E1LC with two serial data
channels.
Default: G732N

CRC-4 Enables the generation NO – CRC-4 option disabled. Select YES, except when the
and evaluation of check YES – CRC-4 option enabled. FCD-E1LC main or sublink is
bits (in accordance with connected to transmission
Default: NO
the CRC-4 polynomial equipment that does not
specified by ITU-T Rec. support this option.
G.704)

SYNC Used to change the frame CCITT – Complies with ITU-T Rec. Select CCITT, unless your
alignment algorithms, to G.732. application has special
reduce the time required 62411 – Complies with AT&T requirements.
for the link to return to TR-62411 (after 10 sec.).
normal operation after
FAST – After 1 second.
loss of sync
Default: CCITT

D-24 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Designation Function Values Configuration Guidelines

RX GAIN Determines the maximum LONG – Maximum attenuation of The lower attenuation
attenuation of the receive 36 dB. available with the SHORT
signal that can be SHORT – Maximum attenuation value may actually improve
compensated for by the of 10 dB. the performance when
main link receive path, to operating over relatively short
Default: SHORT
obtain the BER line sections, especially when
performance required by operating over multi-pair
the standards cables. In such cables,
significant interference is
generated by the signals
carried by other pairs and
therefore, a weak desired
signal may be masked by the
interference.

IDLE_TS_ Selects the code You can also select any desired Select the value specified for
CODE transmitted to fill idle code in the range of 00 to FF use on the corresponding link
(unused) timeslots in the (presented as hexadecimal in your network. Select the
main link frame numbers). same value at the other end.
Default: 3F FCD-E1LC allows you to select
any two-digit hexadecimal
value.
RAI Controls the transfer of ENABLE – The reception of RAI Select in accordance with the
the RAI (remote alarm by the main link interface causes requirements of your specific
indication) from the main the FCD-E1LC sub interface to application
link to the optional sublink send RAI to the equipment
connected to the sublink.
DISABLE – The RAI indication
sent by the sublink is not
affected by RAI reception via the
main link.
Default: DISABLE

DEF NAME
Purpose
Define the node name (up to eight alphanumeric characters).

Syntax
DEF NAME

Use
1. To define the FCD-E1LC node name, type:
DEF NAME<Enter>
FCD-E1LC displays the current name in the following format:

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-25

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

OLD NAME = ‘old name’

where ‘old name’ is the name FCD-E1LC is currently assigned.
The current name is followed by the name entry form:
ENTER NODE NAME (MAX 8 CHARACTERS) =

2. Type the desired name, and then press <Enter>. The new name is displayed
in the following format:
CURRENT NAME = ‘name’
where ‘name’ is the FCD-E1LC current node name.

DEF NODE
Purpose
Define the FCD-E1LC node number, or address. The allowed range is 0 to 255.

Syntax
DEF NODE

Use
1. To define the FCD-E1LC node number, type:
DEF NODE<Enter>
FCD-E1LC displays the node entry form:
NODE (0 to 255) =

2. Type the desired number in the range of 0 to 255, and then press <Enter>.

DEF PROMPT
Purpose
Select the supervisory port prompt.

Syntax
DEF PROMPT

Use
1. To select the supervisory port prompt, type:
DEF PROMPT <Enter>
The prompt selection form is displayed. A typical form is shown below:
PROMPT_TYPE
PRODUCT_NAME

2. To change the current selection, press <F> or <B>, then press <Enter> to end.
The available selections are as follows:
PRODUCT_NAME The prompt displays the equipment type, FCD, followed by >.

D-26 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

GIVEN_NAME The prompt displays the logical name assigned by means of the
DEF NAME command, followed by >.

DEF PWD
Purpose
Define a new user password for FCD-E1LC.

Syntax
DEF PWD

Use
1. To define a new user password, type:
DEF PWD<Enter>
The current password entry screen appears:
OLD PASSWORD = ‘old password’
where ‘old password’ is the current password. The current password is
followed by the password entry form:

NEW PASSWORD [4 to 8 CHARS] =

2. Type the required password (4 to 8 characters). Carefully check that the

specified password has been indeed typed in, and then press <Enter>.
The new password is displayed in the following format:

CURRENT PASSWORD = ‘password’

Note Before entering a new password, make sure that the PSW section of the
FCD-E1LC internal switch SW2 is not set to ON, because in such case the default
password (1234) is enforced.

DEF ROUTE

Purpose
Define network management stations for which all the management traffic will be
statically routed via the FCD-E1LC supervisory port, CONTROL DCE.
You can define static routes for up to 5 stations. A route is defined by specifying
the IP address of the corresponding station.
You do not need to manually include stations with static routes in the managers
list (see the DEF MANAGER LIST command): traps will be sent to the defined
stations via the supervisory port even if the station does not appear in the
managers list.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-27

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Syntax
DEF ROUTE

Use
1. To define a route, type:
DEF ROUTE<Enter>
You will see the current list of routes, in the following format:
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 1 IS: = 192.168.238.001
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 2 IS: = 192.168.200.253
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 3 IS: = 192.168.238.203
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 4 IS: = 192.114.029.209
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 5 IS: = 255.255.255.000

After the current table, you will see the first row of the routes data form,
which is used to define the IP address of the first management station.
2. Type in the IP address of the desired management station. Use the
dotted-quad format (four groups of digits in the range of 0 through 255,
separated by periods).
After filling in the required address, press <Enter> to display the next row.
Repeat the procedure to define the additional route (2 through 5). After
pressing <Enter> for the fifth route, you will see the full updated list, and the
command ends.

DEF SL
Purpose
Define the sublink parameters, and select the timeslots transferred to the main
link.
This command is accepted only by FCD-E1LC units with sublink.

Syntax
DEF SL

Use
1. To define the sublink parameters, type:
DEF SL<Enter>
You will see the first row of the sublink parameters data form. A typical
display is shown below:

D-28 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FRAME CRC-4 SYNC RX_GAIN IDLE_TS_CODE

RAI
G732N NO CCITT SHORT 3F
DISABLE

2. Select the parameters in accordance with Table D-8, and then press <Enter>
to display the second row of the sublink parameters data form.
You will see the second row of the sublink parameters data form. A
typical display is shown below:
CGA OOS_SIG OOS_CODE
NONE N/A 00

3. Change the desired parameters and then press <Enter>:

If the FRAME parameter is UNFRM, the command is ended
If the FRAME parameter is G732N or G732S, you will see the timeslot
mapping parameters row. A typical form is shown below.

MAP_MODE START_TS TS_TYPE NUM_OF_TS

USER N/A N/A N/A

4. Select the MAP_MODE and then press <Enter>.

Note Before continuing, refer to the Sublink Timeslot Mapping Considerations section
below for mapping guidelines.

5. If in Step 4 the MAP_MODE has been set to SEQ:

Press the spacebar to move to the START_TS field, and then press <F> or
<B> to select the desired starting timeslot.
Press the spacebar to move to the TS_TYPE field, and then press <F> or
<B> to select the desired timeslot type.
Press the spacebar to move to the NUM_OF_TS field, and then press <F>
or <B> to select the required number of timeslots. Note that if you select
00, no sub timeslot is connected to the main link.
Press <Enter>. The command is ended and the FCD-E1LC will display the
time and date, followed by the FCD-E1LC prompt.
6. If in Step 4 the MAP_MODE has been set to USER, the START_TS, TS_TYPE
and NUM_OF_TS fields are automatically set to N/A. In this case, press
<Enter> to continue.
You will see the first row of the data channel timeslot assignment map. A
typical display is shown below:
TS : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TYPE : NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

Use the spacebar to move between timeslots. For each timeslot, select
between NC, DATA and VOICE by pressing <F> or <B>.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-29

 Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

After completing the first row, press <Enter> to continue to the next row.
Repeat the procedure until all the timeslots (up to 31) are configured.
7. Pressing <Enter> after the last timeslot ends the command.

Table D-8. Sublink Configuration Parameters

Designation Function Values Configuration Guidelines

FRAME Selects the framing mode See Table D-7 Select the framing mode specified
for the sublink for the equipment connected to
the sublink.

CRC-4 See Table D-7

SYNC See Table D-7
RX GAIN See Table D-7
IDLE_TS_ See Table D-7
CODE
RAI Controls the transfer of the ENABLE – The reception of RAI Select in accordance with the
RAI (remote alarm by the sublink interface causes requirements of your specific
indication) from the sublink the FCD-E1LC main link interface application
to the main link to send RAI to the equipment
connected to the main link.
DISABLE – The RAI indication
sent by the main link is not
affected by RAI reception via the
sublink.
Default: DISABLE
CGA Selects the method used to NONE When the sublink is in The selection depends on your
signal the carrier group the out-of-service particular application:
alarm (CGA) state (link state, the • NONE is suitable for voice
out-of-service) to the other corresponding main link applications.
equipment connected to the timeslots carry the OOS
• TRANS applications with
remote end of the sublink. code selected by the
common channel signaling
user.
(proprietary signaling) and for
TRANS Same as for NONE, but channelized data applications
the signaling bits are
• FULL is a fully transparent
not forced to the OOS
mode, and is often used when
state.
the sublink carries channelized
FULL The state of the or unchannelized data
timeslots and the state
of the signaling bits is
not changed. This mode
is
Default: NONE

D-30 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Designation Function Values Configuration Guidelines

OOS_SIG When NONE is selected for FORCED BUSY – The signaling bits Select in accordance with the
the CGA parameter, this are forced to the busy state method specified for use in your
parameter determines the during out-of-service periods. network.
state of the signaling bits FORCED IDLE – The signaling bits
during out-of-service are forced to the idle state
periods during out-of-service periods.
BUSY IDLE – The signaling bits
are forced to the busy state for
2.5 seconds, then switch to the
idle state until the
out-of-service condition
disappears.
IDLE BUSY – The signaling bits
are forced to the idle state for
2.5 seconds, then switch to the
busy state until the
out-of-service condition
disappears.
Default: FORCED IDLE
OOS_CODE When NONE or TRANS has The available selections are 00 Select in accordance with the
been selected for CGA, to FF (hexa). code specified for use in your
selects the code transmitted Default: 00 network.
during out-of-service
periods

Sublink Timeslot Mapping Considerations

Each sub timeslot selected by the user is connected to the timeslot with the
same number of the main link.
The handling of the timeslot is configured by means of its type:
• VOICE – the timeslot is handled as a voice timeslot, that is, in addition to
transferring the timeslot to the main link, the associated signaling information
(carried in timeslot 16) is also copied to the corresponding bits in timeslot 16
of the main link.
• DATA – the timeslot is handled as a data timeslot, that is, when the FRAME
parameter is G732S, the associated signaling information (carried in timeslot
16) is ignored.

Note • The VOICE type can be selected only when the sub FRAME parameter is G732S.
• When the FRAME parameter is G732S, leave timeslot 16 as NC.
• If you already selected an inband management timeslot (using the DEF
DNLOAD SL command), the selected timeslot type appears as DEDIC and you
cannot change this selection.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-31

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

You must connect a number of sub timeslots equal to that required by the
equipment connected to the sublink. Any unconnected sublink timeslot is filled
with the selected sublink idle timeslot code.
Remember that some of the main link timeslots must be assigned to other
purposes, namely:
• The number of timeslots to be assigned on the main link to the data
channel(s)
• Signaling information (timeslot 16 when using G732S framing)
• Timeslot dedicated to inband management, when using the FRAME_RL mode.
This timeslot is selected using the DEF DNLOAD SL command (on the timeslot
map, this timeslot appears as DEDIC and you cannot change this selection).

DEF SP
Purpose
Define the supervisory (CONTROL DCE) port parameters. Refer to Table D-9 for
the parameter description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Syntax
DEF SP

Use
1. To define the supervisory port parameters, type:
DEF SP<Enter>
The first row of the supervisory port parameters data form is displayed. A
typical form is shown below. The form presents the current parameter
values as defaults.
SPEED STOP_BITS PARITY INTERFACE CTS DCD_DEL
DSR
AUTO 8 NO DCE =RTS 0 MS
ON

2. Change the parameter values by bringing the cursor to the beginning of the
field to be changed using the spacebar, and then press <F> or <B> to scroll
among the available selections. When the desired selection is displayed, press
the spacebar to move to the next field.
3. When done, press <Enter> to display the second row of the supervisory port
parameters data form. A typical display is shown below.
POP_ALM PWD LOG_OFF CALL_OUT_TRIGER ACTIVATE_CALL_OUT
AUXILIARY_DEVICE
NO NO NO NONE ANY CASE
TERMINAL

4. After the desired parameter values are selected, press <Enter> to end, and
then press <Enter> to reconnect to the FCD-E1LC.

D-32 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Table D-9. Supervisory Port Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

SPEED Selects supervisory 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, Select AUTO in order for the
port data rate. 19200, 38400, 57600, FCD-E1LC to automatically
115200 – Supervisory port data identify the incoming traffic
rates in bps data rate. In this case, to
AUTO – Autobaud operation. enable positive identification of
the data rate, each connection
Default: 19200 or AUTO
to the supervisory port must
start with three consecutive
<Enter>.
Do not use AUTO when the
CONTROL DCE port is
configured to use the SLIP or
PPP protocol: in this case, you
may lose the communication
with the FCD-E1LC and you
may have to reload the
factory-default parameters.

STOP_BITS Selects the number 1, 2 – Number of data bits The supervisory port word
of stop bits in the Default: 1 format should be the same as
CONTROL DCE port on the terminal.
word format

PARITY Controls the use of ODD – Odd parity. The supervisory port word
parity EVEN – Even parity. format should be the same as
on the terminal.
NONE – Parity disabled.
Default: NONE

INTERFACE Selects supervisory DCE – The CONTROL DCE port Select DCE when FCD-E1LC is
port interface appears as a DCE for external connected directly to the
equipment terminal.
DTE – The CONTROL DCE port Select DTE when FCD-E1LC is
appears as a DTE, for connection connected to the terminal via a
via modem to the external modem.
equipment
Default: DCE

CTS Controls the state ON – CTS line is always ON

of the CTS line in (active).
the CONTROL DCE =RTS – CTS line tracks the RTS
port line.
Default: =RTS

DCD_DEL With the CONTROL The available values are 0, 10, If you select a non-zero value
DCE port defined as 50, 100, 200, and 300 msec. when the port interface is
DTE, indicates the Default: 0 programmed as DCE, you will
delay (in msec) receive an error message.
between DCD=ON
and sending of data

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-33

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

DSR Controls the state ON – DSR line is continuously If you select DSR=ON when INT
of the DSR line on. It will switch to OFF for five is set to DTE, you will receive
seconds after the DTR line is an error message.
switched OFF.
=DTR – DSR line tracks the DTR
line.
Default: ON

POP_ALM Controls the YES – The terminal automatically

automatic sending displays every 10 minutes the
of alarms to a alarm status (or whenever an
terminal connected alarm which is not masked using
to the CONTROL the DEF ALM MASK command
DCE port changes to ON).
NO – No automatic display.
Default: NO

PWD Controls password YES – Password protection

protection enabled.
NO – Password protection
disabled.
Default: NO

LOG_OFF Controls the idle NO – Automatic session

disconnect time of disconnection disabled. To end
the CONTROL DCE the session, use the BYE
port command.
3_MIN – Automatic
disconnection after 3 minutes if
no data is received by the
CONTROL DCE port.
10_MIN – Automatic
disconnection after 10 minutes
if no data is received by the
CONTROL DCE port.
Default: NO
CALL_OUT_ Selects the type of NONE – The call-out function is
TRIGGER alarms that will disabled.
trigger the call-out ALL – FCD-E1LC will initiate a call
function (reporting after each new alarm.
of alarms via a
MAJOR – FCD-E1LC will initiate a
modem connected
call only when a new major
to the CONTROL
alarm condition is detected.
DCE port)
Default: NONE

D-34 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

ACTIVATE_ If CALL_OUT_ ANY CASE – Call-out is activated

CALL_OUT TRIGGER is not set in any case.
to NONE, defines
LINK FAIL – Call-out is activated
when the call-out only when a link failure occurs or
function is activated there is local or remote
synchronization loss.
Default: ANY CASE
AUXILIARY_ Selects the TERMINAL – The CONTROL DCE Select NMS-SLIP or NMS-PPP
DEVICE management mode port is connected using an ASCII when the supervisory port
supported by the supervision terminal. must be able to use the SLIP,
CONTROL DCE port. NMS-SLIP – The CONTROL DCE respectively NMS protocol, for
port connects to an SNMP example for SNMP or Telnet
management station and/or management.
Telnet host using the SLIP If the management connection
protocol. to the FCD-E1LC CONTROL DCE
NMS-PPP – The CONTROL DCE port uses a chain topology (for
port connects to an SNMP example, when it is connected
management station and/or to the serial port of a
Telnet host using the PPP Megaplex-2100), select
protocol. SLIP-AGENT.
SLIP-AGENT – The CONTROL DCE Select TERMINAL if only the
port connects to another agent supervision terminal must be
port using the SLIP protocol. See supported.
additional details in Appendix B.
Default: TERMINAL

DEF SYS

Purpose
Define the system parameters. Refer to Table D-10 for the parameter
description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Syntax
DEF SYS

Use
To define the FCD-E1LC system parameters, type:
DEF SYS<Enter>
The system parameters data form is displayed. A typical form is shown
below. The form presents the current parameter values as defaults.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-35

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

CLK_MASTER CLK_FBACK DATE_FORMAT

ML NONE DD-MM-YYYY

After the desired parameter values are selected, press <Enter> to end.

Table D-10. System Configuration Parameters

Designation Function Values Configuration Guidelines

CLK_MASTER Selects the master INT – Internal oscillator. Select ML for connection to
system timing ML – Locked to the recovered main carrier lines.
reference. link receive clock. Select CH1 or CH2 for
SL – Locked to the recovered sublink connection to a data
receive clock. network.

CH1 – Locked to the external clock Select INT at one end and
supplied to the user data channel 1, ML at the other end for
provided the channel timing mode is point-to-point lines.
DTE2.
CH2 – Locked to the external clock
supplied to the user data channel 2,
provided the channel timing mode is
DTE2.
Default: ML

CLK_FBACK Selects the alternate NONE – No fallback source is used. In Select a source different
(fallback) system this case, the internal oscillator is from that selected as
timing reference, for automatically selected when the master.
use in case the master reference fails. Select NONE to disable
master reference ML – Locked to the recovered main switching to the fallback
fails. link receive clock. source. In this case, the
SL – Locked to the recovered sublink default fallback clock source
receive clock. is the FCD-E1LC internal
clock oscillator.
CH1 – Locked to the external clock
supplied to the user data channel 1,
provided the channel timing mode is
DTE2.
CH2 – Locked to the external clock
supplied to the user data channel 2,
provided the channel timing mode is
DTE2.
N/A – Appears when the internal
oscillator has been selected as master
reference, and therefore the fallback
source is not relevant.
Default: NONE

DATE_FORMAT Selects the date The available selections are

display format DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, and
YYYY-MM-DD.
Default: YYYY-MM-DD

D-36 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

DEF TERM

Purpose
Define the control codes for use with one of the following types of terminals:
TV920, VT52, VT100, Freedom 100/110 or Freedom 220, or reset the codes to 0.
If you are using a different type of terminal, use the F command to define the
desired codes. The codes used by the above-mentioned terminals are listed in
Table D-11.

Table D-11. Supervision Terminal Control Codes

Terminal Type
Function
TV920 VT52 VT100 Freedom 100/110 Freedom 220

Clear Screen 1B2A0000 N/A 1B5B324A 1B2A0000 1B5B324A

Cursor Home 1E000000 1B480000 1B5B4800 1E000000 1B5B4800
Cursor Right 0C000000 1B424000 1B5B3143 0C000000 1B5B0143

Syntax
DEF TERM {‘terminal type’}

Use
1. To reset the terminal control codes to 0, type:
DEF TERM<Enter>
2. To select the control codes for one of the above-mentioned types, type:
DEF TERM ‘terminal type’<Enter>
where ‘terminal type’ stands for TV920, VT52, VT100, Freedom100, or
Freedom220.
3. Press <Enter> again to end.

DSP AGENT

Purpose
Display the FCD-E1LC agent parameters.

Syntax
DSP AGENT

Use
To display the agent parameters, type:
DSP AGENT<Enter>

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-37

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

You will see the SNMP parameters data form. A typical form is shown
below:
AGENT PARAMETERS
- - - - - - - - -
IP ADDRESS IS : = 114.29.17.2

Refer to the DEF AGENT section for an explanation of the information displayed
by this command.

DSP ALM

Purpose
Display the contents of the alarm buffer. This buffer can contain up to
100 alarms.

Syntax
DSP ALM /CA

Use
• To display the complete contents of the buffer, type:
DSP ALM<Enter>
• To display the complete buffer contents and then clear all the alarms, type:
DSP ALM /CA<Enter>
The contents of the alarm buffer are displayed as a table with four columns. The
columns include the alarm code, alarm description, the link on which the alarm
condition has been detected, alarm status, date and time of occurrence.
A header precedes each block of alarms received from an FCD-E1LC. The header
lists the node number and the assigned node name, and it serves as an easily
identified separator between the alarms transmitted by different FCD-E1LC units.
The alarm messages that can be displayed by the terminal are explained in
Chapter 4.

DSP BERT ML

Purpose
Display the results of an on-going bit error ratio measurement on the data
channel. When monitoring the BERT results, you may also start and stop error
injection, and restart the error count by clearing the accumulated error results.

Note Monitoring is not possible when using Telnet.

The error injection rate is defined by means of the DEF BERT ML command.

D-38 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

Syntax
DSP BERT ML

Use
• To display the current results of the BER test on the data channel, type:
DSP BERT ML<Enter>
• To display the current results of the BER test and then reset the error count,
type:
DSP BERT ML /C<Enter>
• To monitor the results of the BERT test, type:
DSP BERT ML /R<Enter>
In this case, you will see the commands you can use while monitoring the
BER test results, and then the results themselves.
PRESS I FOR ERRORS INJECT
PRESS S FOR STOP ERRORS INJECT
PRESS C TO CLEAR ERROR BITS

Note When using the single-error mode, pressing I injects a single error. To inject an
additional error, first press S before pressing I.

To stop the monitoring and obtain again the command prompt, press <CTRL+C>
(BREAK). When using Telnet, it is not possible to monitor the results. Therefore,
use the following command to display the results and start the injection of
errors:
DSP BERT ML /I<Enter>
and the command
DSP BERT ML /S<Enter>
to display the results and then stop the injection of errors.
The BER test results displayed on the screen are correct for the instant the
display command has been issued (or since the last time the counters have been
cleared, whichever occurred last). When the /R option is used, the results are
periodically updated. The results are presented in the following format:
BERT OF CHANNEL - 1
ERROR_BITS RUN_TIME(SEC) ERRORS(SEC) SYNC_LOSS(SEC)
ERROR_INJECT
0 3 0 0 OFF

The display fields are as follows:

ERROR_BITS Total number of bit errors detected.

RUN_TIME(SEC) Total time the test is running.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-39

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

ERRORS(SEC) Total number of seconds in which errors have been

detected.

SYNC LOSS(SEC) Total number of seconds in which loss of frame alignment

occurred.

ERROR INJECT(SEC) Indicates whether errors are injected (ON) or not (OFF).

Note All the counters have a range of 0 through 65535. When the maximum value is
reached, the counter freezes, therefore in general a value of 65535 indicates the
counter has overflown.

DSP HDR TST

Purpose
Display the results of the last hardware test (made during power-on self-test and
during regular operation).

Syntax
DSP HDR TST

Use
To display the hardware test report, type:
DSP HDR TST<Enter>
The display has one field that shows NO HARDWARE FAILURE if everything checks
well, or lists the detected problem: EPROM FAILURE, I/O EXP FAILURE, COUNTER
FAILURE, ILLEGL SYS CNFG or SFIFO FAIL.

DSP MANAGER LIST

Purpose
Display the network management stations to which the SNMP agent of this
FCD-E1LC system sends traps. The information that is provided for each network
management station includes its IP address and the corresponding subnet mask.

Syntax
DSP MANAGER LIST

Use
• To display the current list of network management stations, type:
DSP MANAGER LIST<Enter>

D-40 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

You will see the list of network management stations that receive traps
generated by this FCD-E1LC system. A typical display is shown below:

MANAGERS LIST PARAMETERS

MANAGER 1 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.114.029.209
MANAGER 1 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.240
MANAGER 2 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.168.238.196
MANAGER 2 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.000
MANAGER 3 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.168.238.244
MANAGER 3 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.240
MANAGER 4 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.114.027.036
MANAGER 4 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.000
MANAGER 5 IP ADDRESS IS : 192.168.238.061
MANAGER 5 SUBNET MASK IS : 255.255.255.240

DSP PM ML
Purpose
Display the contents of the main link performance monitoring registers specified
by AT&T Pub. 54016. For an explanation of the performance monitoring registers,
refer to the Performance Diagnostic Data section in Chapter 4.

Syntax
DSP PM ML [/C] [/CA]

Use
1. To display the main link performance monitoring registers, type:
DSP PM ML<Enter>
2. To display the performance monitoring registers, and then clear only the
event register, type:
DSP PM ML /C<Enter>
3. To display the performance monitoring registers, clear all the performance
monitoring registers of the main link, and restart the count intervals, type
DSP PM ML /CA<Enter>
The performance monitoring registers are listed in the following order
(the numbers in brackets indicate the range of values for each register).

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-41

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

PM OF – MAIN LINK
CRC ERROR EVENTS = [0] ..... [65535]
CRC AVG ERROR EVNTS = [0] ..... [65535]
CURRENT ES = [0] ..... [900]
CURRENT UAS = [0] ..... [900]
CURRENT SES = [0] ..... [900]
CURRENT BES = [0] ..... [900]
CURRENT LES [0] ..... [900]
CURRENT SEFS [0] ..... [900]
CURRENT LOFC = [0] ..... [255]
CURRENT CSS = [0] ..... [255]
CURRENT DM
CURRENT TIMER = [0] ..... [900]
INTERVAL 01
ES=nnn UAS=nnn BES=nnn LES=nnn SEFS=nnn SES=nnn LOFC=nnn CSS=nnn DM=nnn
INTERVAL 02
ES=nnn UAS=nnn BES=nnn LES=nnn SEFS=nnn SES=nnn LOFC=nnn CSS=nnn DM=nnn
.
.
.
24 HOUR ES = [0] ..... [65535]
24 HOUR UAS = [0] ..... [65535]
24 HOUR SES = [0] ..... [65535]
24 HOUR BES = [0] ..... [65535]
24 HOUR LES [0] ..... [65535]
24 HOUR SEFS [0] ..... [65535]
24 HOUR LOFC = [0] ..... [255]
24 HOUR CSS = [0] ..... [255]
24 DEGRADE MIN = [0] ..... [1440]
LAST 24 DEGRADE MIN = [0] ..... [1440]
24 INTERVAL = [0] ..... [96]

where mm is 0 to 96, and nnn is 0 to 900.

D-42 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

DSP PM SL
Display the contents of the sublink performance monitoring registers specified by
AT&T Pub. 54016. For an explanation of the performance monitoring registers,
refer to the Performance Diagnostic Data section in Chapter 4.

Syntax
DSP PM SL [/C] [/CA]

Use
The sublink configuration parameters are similar to those of the main link. Refer
to the DSP PM ML command for detailed information.

DSP REM AGENT

Purpose
Display information on the remote SNMP agents that are known to the FCD-E1LC
management traffic router, provided SNMP management is enabled.

Syntax
DSP REM AGENT

Use
1. To display the remote agent information, type:
DSP REM AGENT<Enter>
A typical table listing the remote agents is shown below:
IP ADDRESS MUX NAME DISTANCE
- - – - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
192.114.050.002 New-York 13
192.114.150.122 Chicago 9

Note If no remote agents are known, you will see a CANNOT FIND REMOTE AGENTS.

The fields displayed for each agent are as follows:

IP ADDRESS The IP address of the remote agent.
MUX NAME The logical name of the remote agent.
DISTANCE Metric that indicates the logical distance (through the
management network) to the remote agent, and is used,
among other factors, in the selection of the optimal route to
be used by the management traffic.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-43

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

2. To display the remote agent information including management stations that

are connected to FCD-E1LC, type:
DSP REM AGENT /A<Enter>
You will see a table listing the remote agents. A typical table is shown
below:
IP ADDRESS MUX NAME DISTANCE

192.114.029.209 ** NMS ** 15

192.168.238.196 ** NMS ** 12

192.168.238.244 ** NMS ** 9

192.114.027.036 ** NMS ** 7

192.168.238.061 ** NMS ** 2

192.168.238.001 ** NMS ** 3

192.168.200.253 ** NMS ** 3

192.168.238.203 fcd245 5

DSP ST CH
Purpose
Display status information on serial data channels.

Syntax
DSP ST CH CC

Use
• To display the data channel status information, type:
DSP ST CH CC<Enter>
where CC is the desired channel number, 1 or 2.
A typical channel status display is shown below:
STATUS OF CHANNEL – X
LOOPS TYPE = LOCAL REMOTE
NO NO
PORT STATE = CONNECTED
RTS/CONTROL STATE = OFF
INTERFACE = V.35

The fields included in the status display are listed below:

LOOPS Displays the current state of the loopbacks activated on the data
channel.
The LOCAL field indicates the local loopback state:

D-44 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

• NO – local loopback is deactivated.

• YES – local loopback is activated.
The REMOTE field indicates the remote loopback state:
• NO – remote loopback is deactivated.
• YES – remote loopback is activated.
PORT STATE Displays whether the data channel is connected to the main link:
• CONNECTED – the channel is connected.
• NOT CONNECTED – the channel is not connected.
RTS STATE Displays the RTS line state in the serial data channel connector:
• OFF – the RTS line is not active.
• ON – the RTS line is active.
INTERFACE Displays the interface type:
• V.35 – V.35 interface
• X.21 – X.21 interface
• RS-232 – V.24/RS-232 interface
• RS-530 – RS-530 interface or V.36/RS-449 via adapter cable
• IR-ETH/QN – Ethernet 10/100BaseT bridge with VLAN support.

DSP ST ML
Purpose
Display main link status information.

Syntax
DSP ST ML [/C]

Use
1. To display the main link status information, type:
DSP ST ML<Enter>
2. To display the main link status information, and then clear its error event
registers, type:
DSP ST ML /C<Enter>
A typical main link status display is shown below.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-45

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

STATUS OF -
MAIN LINK
TYPE = E1
FUNCTION = COPPER UNBALANCE
ALARMS L.SYNC LOSS R.SYNC LOSS
=========== ===========
OFF OFF
LOOPS DIGITAL ANALOG
LOCAL REMOTE LOCAL REMOTE
===== ====== ===== ======
NO NO NO NO
BERT RX_INBAND TX_INBAND
===== ========= =========
NO NO NO
DOWNLOAD MODE = NONE
OOS CNTR = 1
BPV LAST MINUTE = 0
BPV WORST MINUTE = 0

The fields included in the status information displays are listed below:
TYPE Indicates the main link interface, E1.
INTERFACE Indicates the currently selected main link interface type:
COPPER BALANCE or COPPER UNBALANCE, balanced or
unbalanced
ALARMS Indicates the state of the port alarms:
• L.SYNC LOSS – state of local frame synchronization.
• R.SYNC LOSS – state of remote frame synchronization.
LOOPS Indicates the state of loops that can be activated on the
main link:
• DIGITAL LOCAL – This field displays YES to indicate that
the local digital loopback has been activated.
• DIGITAL REMOTE – This field displays YES to indicate that
the remote digital loopback has been activated.
• ANALOG LOCAL – This field displays YES to indicate that
the local analog loopback has been activated.
• ANALOG REMOTE – This field displays YES to indicate
that the remote analog loopback has been activated.
• BERT – This field displays YES to indicate that the BER
test has been activated.
• RX_INBAND This field displays YES when a loopback
has been connected as a result of the reception of the
inband remote loopback activation sequence.
• TX_INBAND This field displays YES to indicate that the
user requested the sending of the inband remote
loopback activation sequence.

D-46 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

DOWNLOAD MODE Displays the inband management mode selected for the
main link: TS0/F or FRAME RL
OOS CNTR Displays the number of local loss of frame alignment events
detected since the last time the counters were cleared.
BPV LAST MINUTE Displays the number of BPV events detected in the last
minute.
BPV WORST MINUTE Displays the number of BPV events detected during the
worst minute since the last time the counters were cleared.

DSP ST SL
Display sublink status information.

Syntax
DSP ST SL [/C]

Use
The sublink configuration parameters are similar to those of the main link, except
that there are no BERT, RX_INBAND and TX_INBAND fields. Refer to the DSP ST ML
command for detailed information.

DSP ST SYS
Purpose
Display system status information.

Syntax
DSP ST SYS

Use
• To view the system status, type:
DSP ST SYS<Enter>
A typical system status display is shown below.
NODE = ‘node number’
NAME = ‘FCD-E1LC name’
NODAL CLOCK = INT
SOFTWARE VER = 01.00
HARDWARE VER = 00.02
FCD TYPE = E1/2
POWER SUPPLY = AC

The fields included in the system status information displays are listed below:
NODE The node number (0 through 255) assigned to the
FCD-E1LC.
NAME The system name assigned to the FCD-E1LC.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-47

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

NODAL CLOCK Indicates the nodal clock source: INT, CH1, CH2 or ML.
SOFTWARE VER The software version of the FCD-E1LC.
HARDWARE VER The hardware version of the FCD-E1LC.
FCD TYPE Indicates the type and the number (1 or 2) of data channels
of this FCD-E1LC.

DSP TS

Purpose
Display information on the use and type of main link timeslots.

Syntax
DSP TS

Use
• To display the timeslot information, type:
DSP TS<Enter>
A typical display is shown:
TS : 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

TYPE : DATA NC DATA DATA DATA NC DEDIC DATA DATA NC

DEST : CH1 NA CH2 NA NA NA ML CH1 NA NA

TS : 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

TYPE : DATA NC DATA DATA DATA DATA NC DATA DATA NC

DEST : CH1 NA CH1 NA NA NA NA CH2 NA NA

TS : 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

TYPE : DATA NC DATA DATA DATA NC DATA DATA DATA NC NC

DEST : CH1 NA NA CH2 NA NA NA CH1 NA NA NA

The fields included in the timeslot displays are listed below:

TS Indicates the main link timeslot number, 1 through 31.
TYPE Indicates the timeslot utilization:
• NA – timeslot not connected (FCD-E1LC inserts the idle code in
such timeslots).
• DATA – data channel.

D-48 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

• DEDIC – timeslot dedicated to management traffic.

DEST Indicates the port (or channel) using that timeslot.
• ML – main link.
• S1 – sublink.
• CH1 – data channel 1
• CH2 – data channel 2.

EXIT
Purpose
End the current communication session.

Syntax
EXIT

Use
• To end the current communication session, type:
EXIT<Enter>

F
Purpose
Define the codes used to be sent to the supervision terminal to perform the
following terminal control functions:
• Clear screen.
• Move cursor to screen home position.
• Move cursor to the right by one position.
If you have a TV920, VT52, VT100, Freedom 100 or Freedom 220 terminal, you
can use the DEF TERM command to set the control codes for that terminal.

Syntax
F

Use
1. To display the current codes, type:
F<Enter>
The terminal function entry screen is displayed. The screen includes three
separate rows, displayed one after the other.
A typical screen, showing all the three rows, is shown below:

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-49

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

CLEAR SCREEN = hhhhhhhh

CURSOR HOME = hhhhhhhh
CURSOR RIGHT = hhhhhhhh

where h indicates hexadecimal digits.

2. To change a code, enter the appropriate hexadecimal digit under the first
digit of the code, the cursor advances to the next digit.
3. Repeat the procedure until all the necessary digits are changed, and then
press <Enter> to end.

HELP

Purpose
Display an index of the supervision terminal commands, and the options available
for each command.

Syntax
HELP

Use
Type:
HELP<Enter>
You will see the first HELP page. Press the spacebar to see the next page.

INIT DB

Purpose
Load the default parameter values (see Table D-12) instead of user’s
configuration.

Syntax
INIT DB

Use
To load the default parameters, type:
INIT DB<Enter>
After reloading the default parameters, FCD-E1LC displays the following
message:

D-50 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD Supervisory Port On Line. Type 'H' for help

and then the time and date fields followed by the FCD-E1LC prompt.
Table D-12. FCD-E1LC Default Configuration Used with Supervision Terminal

Type Parameter Designation Default Value

General PASSWORD 1234

NODE (node number) 0
CLEAR SCREEN 00 00 00 00
CURSOR HOME 00 00 00 00
CURSOR right 00 00 00 00

System CLK_MASTER ML
CLK_FBACK NONE
DATE_FORMAT YYYY-MM-DD
LEARNING_MODE DISABLED

Main Link FRAME G732N

CRC-4 NO
SYNC CCITT
IDLE_TS_CODE 00
RX_GAIN SHORT

Download Parameters MODE NONE

TS NUM N/A
SPEED N/A

Data/Ethernet Channels SPEED NC

MAP_MODE USER
START_TS N/A
TS TYPE N/A
FIFO_SIZE AUTO
CLOCK_MODE DCE
CTS ON
ETHERNET MODE HALF
BRIDGING TRANS
CLOCK_POLARITY NORMAL
TIMESLOT MAP
DEST NONE
TYPE NC

BERT Parameters BERT_PATTERN 2E23-1

ERROR_INJECTION_RATE NO_ERR
RX_INBAND DISABLE
INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN RDL LOOP

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-51

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Type Parameter Designation Default Value

SP (Supervisory Port) SPEED AUTO

STOP BIT 1
PARITY NO
INTERFACE DCE
CTS =RTS
DCD_DEL 0_MSEC
DSR ON
PWD NO
POP_ALM NO
LOG_OFF NO
CALL_OUT_TRIGGER NONE
ACTIVATE_CALL_OUT ANY CASE
AUXILIARY_DEVICE TERMINAL

LOOP

Purpose
Activate the specified user-initiated test or loopback. If you want to activate an
additional loopback or test while another is already activated, first refer to
Chapter 4 for lists of allowed combinations.
If you try to activate a loopback or test not allowed at this stage, you will see
ERROR 051 - ILLEGAL PORT LOOP COMBINATION).

Note The FCD-E1LC rear-panel E1/T1 LOOPBACK switch can also be used to activate the
following loopbacks:
• Main link local analog loopback
• Main link remote analog loopback
• Sublink local analog loopback
• Sublink remote analog loopback.
The functions of this switch are described in Chapter 2. To activate a loopback,
the corresponding switch section must be set to ON.

Syntax
LOOP {‘loopback’}

Use
1. To activate all the main link loopbacks and tests, type:
LOOP ML<Enter> or LP ML<Enter>
To activate a specific main link loopback or test, type:
LOOP LOC ANA ML<Enter> or LP LOC ANA ML<Enter>
LOOP REM ANA ML<Enter> or LP REM ANA ML<Enter>
LOOP LOC DIG ML<Enter> or LP LOC DIG ML<Enter>

D-52 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

LOOP REM DIG ML<Enter> or LP REM DIG ML<Enter>

LOOP BERT ML<Enter> or LP BERT ML<Enter>
LOOP INBAND ML<Enter> or LP INBAND ML<Enter>
2. To activate all the sublink loopbacks and tests, type:
LOOP SL<Enter> or LP SL<Enter>
To activate a specific sublink loopback or test, type:
LOOP LOC ANA SL<Enter> or LP LOC ANA SL<Enter>
LOOP REM ANA SL<Enter> or LP REM ANA SL<Enter>
LOOP LOC DIG SL<Enter> or LP LOC DIG SL<Enter>
LOOP REM DIG SL<Enter> or LP REM DIG SL<Enter>
3. To activate a data channel loopback, type:
LOOP LOC CH 1<Enter> or LP LOC CH 1<Enter>
LOOP LOC CH 2<Enter> or LP LOC CH 2<Enter>
LOOP REM CH 1<Enter> or LP REM CH 1<Enter>
LOOP REM CH 2<Enter> or LP REM CH 2<Enter>

Notes • Inband loopback and BER testing are available on channel 1 only.
• The activation of an inband loopback is made by repeatedly transmitting the
activation sequence, therefore the loopback can be considered as activated
only after approximately 2 seconds.

If the requested loopback is already active, you will receive ERROR 053: CURRENT
LOOP ALREADY BEING PERFORMED. If the requested loopback is not supported by
the FCD-E1LC version, you will receive ERROR 055: LOOP NOT SUPPORTED ON
CURRENT FCD TYPE.
If you are trying to activate a loopback on a data channel of an FCD-E1LC with
Ethernet interface, you will see ERROR 056: ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT
PORT MODE. Nevertheless, the BERT test (LOOP BERT) is allowed.

RESET
Purpose
Reset the FCD-E1LC system.

Syntax & Use

• To reset the FCD-E1LC, type:
RESET<Enter>
You are requested to confirm the operation.

TIME
Purpose
Set the time for the FCD-E1LC internal clock.

FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0 Commands D-53

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

Syntax
TIME

Use
1. To set the FCD-E1LC internal clock time, type:
TIME<Enter>
FCD-E1LC sends the time entry form:
HOUR = 12
MINUTE = 25
SECOND = 16

2. Bring the cursor to the first field to be changed by pressing <Enter> and use
<F> or <B> to change the digits.
3. Set the time about one minute beyond the current time, and then press
<Enter> at the correct instant.
FCD-E1LC will display the time and date fields (note that time has changed),
followed by the FCD-E1LC prompt.

D-54 Commands FCD-E1LC Ver. 1.0

 24 Raoul Wallenberg Street, Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel: +972-3-6458181, Fax +972-3-6483331, +972-3-6498250
E-mail: [email protected], Web site: http://www.rad.com

Customer Response Form

RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product documentation.
Please complete and return this form by mail or by fax or send us an e-mail with your
comments.

Thank you for your assistance!

Manual Name: FCD-E1LC version 1.0

Publication Number: 389-200-03/07

Please grade the manual according to the following factors:

Excellent Good Fair Poor Very Poor

Installation instructions ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ

Operating instructions ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ

Manual organization ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ

Illustrations ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ

The manual as a whole ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ

What did you like about the manual?

Error Report
Type of error(s) or ˆ Incompatibility with product
problem(s): ˆ Difficulty in understanding text
ˆ Regulatory information (Safety, Compliance, Warnings, etc.)
ˆ Difficulty in finding needed information
ˆ Missing information
ˆ Illogical flow of information
ˆ Style (spelling, grammar, references, etc.)
ˆ Appearance
ˆ Other

Please list the exact page numbers with the error(s), detail the errors you found (information missing,
unclear or inadequately explained, etc.) and attach the page to your fax, if necessary.

Please add any comments or suggestions you may have.

You are: ˆ Distributor

ˆ End user
ˆ VAR
ˆ Other
Who is your distributor?
Your name and company:
Job title:
Address:
Direct telephone number and extension:
Fax number:
E-mail:
Publication No. 389-200-03/07

International Headquarters
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street
Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel. 972-3-6458181
Fax 972-3-6498250, 6474436
E-mail [email protected]

North America Headquarters

900 Corporate Drive
Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA
Tel. 201-5291100
Toll free 1-800-4447234
Fax 201-5295777
E-mail [email protected]

www.rad.com Innovative Access Solutions